You are on page 1of 154

GEI-100364D

Supersedes GEI-100364C
070730
FERGADV
GE Consumer & Industrial
41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062
www.geelectrical.com
GE Consumer & Industrial
AF-300 P11
Users Guide
G
E

C
o
n
s
u
m
e
r

&

I
n
d
u
s
t
r
i
a
l























A
F
-
3
0
0

P
1
1

U
s
e
r

s

G
u
i
d
e
























































































































G
E
I
-
1
0
0
3
6
4
D
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
2007 by GE Drives, Inc.
All rights reserved.
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide every possible
contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. If further information is desired, or if particular
problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purpose, the matter should be referred to GE
Drives, Plainville, CT USA.
This document contains proprietary information of GE Drives and is furnished to its customer solely to assist that
customer in the installation, testing, operation, and/or maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall
not be reproduced in whole or in part, nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party without the written
approval of GE Drives.
AF-300 P11 is a trademark of GE Drives
Energy $aver is a registered trademark of General Electric Company, USA.
Genius is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Profibus is a trademark of Profibus International.
X$D is a trademark of General Electric Company, USA.
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
WARNING:
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock or burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained
and thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the instructions should install, operate, or maintain this equipment.
Isolation of test equipment from the equipment under test presents potential electrical hazards. If the test equipment
cannot be grounded to the equipment under test, the test equipments case must be shielded to prevent contact by
personnel.
To minimize hazard of electrical shock or burn, approved grounding practices and procedures must be strictly
followed.
WARNING:
To prevent personal injury or equipment damage caused by equipment malfunction, only adequately trained person-
nel should modify any programmable machine.
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
i. Preface .................................................................... i
Safety Instructions .................................................. iii
Model Numbering System Diagram....................... vii
Dimensions & Weights .......................................... viii
1. Before Using This Product 1-1
Receiving Instructions.......................................... 1-1
Appearance.......................................................... 1-1
Handling the Product ........................................... 1-2
Carrying ............................................................... 1-3
Storage ................................................................ 1-3
Ratings Efficiency and Watts Loss ...................... 1-4
2. Installation Environment and Connection 2-1
Operating Environment ........................................ 2-1
Installation Method .............................................. 2-1
Connection........................................................... 2-3
Basic Connection Diagrams ........................... 2-4
Connecting the Main Circuit and
Ground Terminals ....................................... 2-8
Connecting the Control Terminals ................ 2-11
Terminal Configuration.................................. 2-15
Cable Size, Tightening Torque &
Circuit Protection Rating .......................... 2-16
DC Link Reactor ........................................... 2-17
3. Operation 3-1
Inspection and Preparation Before Operation ..... 3-1
Operation Method................................................ 3-1
Trial Run ............................................................... 3-1
4. Keypad Panel 4-1
Appearance of Keypad Panel .............................. 4-1
Operation From the Keypad Panel ...................... 4-2
Normal Operation ........................................... 4-2
Alarm Modes .................................................. 4-2
Entering Data on the Keypad Panel .................... 4-4
Operation Mode.............................................. 4-4
Setting Digital Frequency ............................... 4-4
Switching to LED Digital Monitor .................... 4-5
Program Menu Screen .................................... 4-5
Setting Function Data ..................................... 4-5
Checking Function Data ................................. 4-7
Monitoring Operating Status .......................... 4-7
I/O Check........................................................ 4-8
Maintenance Information ................................ 4-9
Load Rate Measurement .............................. 4-10
Alarm Information ......................................... 4-11
Alarm History and Factors ............................ 4-12
Data Copy ..................................................... 4-13
Alarm Mode .................................................. 4-15
5. Function Selection 5-1
Function Selection List ........................................ 5-1
Alphabetical Function List ................................... 5-5
Function Explanation ........................................... 5-7
F: Fundamental Functions .............................. 5-7
E: Extensions Terminal Functions ................. 5-18
C: Control Functions of Frequency............... 5-28
6. Protective Operations 6-1
List of Protective Functions ................................. 6-1
Alarm Reset ......................................................... 6-2
7. Troubleshooting 7-1
Activation of Protective Function ......................... 7-1
Abnormal Motor Rotation .................................... 7-5
8. Maintenance and Inspection 8-1
Daily Inspections .................................................. 8-1
Periodic Inspections ............................................ 8-1
Main Circuit Measurements ................................. 8-4
Insulation Test ...................................................... 8-5
Replacement Parts .............................................. 8-5
9. Warranty Parts and Service 9-1
In-Warranty Failure Checklist ............................... 9-2
Table of Contents
i
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
10. Replacement Parts 10-1
11. Specifications 11-1
Standard Specifications ..................................... 11-1
Common Specifications..................................... 11-3
Outline Dimensions ............................................ 11-5
Keypad Mounting Hole .................................... 11-12
12. RS485 Modbus RTU Serial Communications 12-1
Transmission Specification ................................ 12-1
Connection......................................................... 12-1
Serial Interface Configuration ............................ 12-1
Modbus RTU Functions ..................................... 12-1
Drive Function Code Access ............................. 12-2
Command and Monitor Data Registers ............. 12-2
Data Format Specification ................................. 12-4
Communication Errors ....................................... 12-8
13. Options 13-1
Built-in Options .................................................. 13-1
14. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 14-1
General ............................................................... 14-1
Recommended Installation Instructions ............ 14-1
ii
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Safety Instructions
Read this manual carefully before installing, connecting (wiring), operating, servicing, or inspecting the drive.
Familiarize yourself with all safety features before using the drive.
In this manual, safety messages are classified as follows:
WARNING Improper operation may result in serious personal injury or death.
CAUTION Improper operation may result in slight to medium personal injury or property damage.
Situations more serious than those covered by CAUTION will depend on prevailing circumstances.
Always follow instructions.
Instructions on Use
WARNING
This drive is designed to drive a 3-phase induction motor and is not suitable for a single-phase or
other types of motors.
This drive may not be used as a component of a life-support system or other medical device directly
affecting the personal welfare of the user.
This drive is manufactured under strict quality control standards. However, safety equipment must be
installed or the failure of this device may result in personal injury, property damage, or risk an accident.
Instructions on Installation
WARNING
Mount this drive on an incombustible material such as metal, otherwise a risk of fire may result.
Do not place combustible or flammable material near this drive, as fire may result.
CAUTION
Do not hold or carry this drive by its cover. Do not drop the converter, as injury may result.
Ensure that the drive and heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter (lint, paper dust, small chips of
wood or metal, and dust), as fire or accident may result.
Do not install or operate a damaged drive or a drive with missing parts, as electric shock or
injury may occur.
iii
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Instructions on Wiring
WARNING
Connect the drive to power via a line-protection molded-case circuit breaker or fuse, as fire may result.
Always connect a ground wire, as electric shock or fire may result.
A licensed specialist must perform all wiring work, as electric shock may result.
Turn off the power before wiring, as electric shock may result.
Wire the drive after mechanical installation is complete, as electric shock or injury may occur.
CAUTION
Confirm that the number of phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply,
otherwise injury may result.
Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, and W), as injury may result.
Do not directly connect a braking resistor to the DC terminals (P(+) and N(-)), as fire may result.
Ensure that the noise generated by the drive, motor, or wiring does not adversely affect peripheral
sensors and equipment, as an accident may result.
Instructions on Operation
WARNING
Be sure to install the cover before turning on the power. Do not remove the cover while power to the drive
is turned on. Electric shock may occur.
Do not operate switches with wet hands, as electric shock may result. When the retry function is selected,
the drive may restart automatically after tripping. Design the machine to ensure personal safety in the
event of restart. Accident may result.
When the torque limiting function is selected, operating conditions may differ from preset parameters
(acceleration/deceleration time or speed). In this case, personal safety must be assured.
An accident may result.
The STOP key is only effective when a function setting has been established. Install an independent
emergency switch to disable the STOP key on the keypad panel when an operation is selected via the
external signal terminal, otherwise an accident may result.
Operations can start up suddenly, after an alarm is reset, if there is a run signal present.
Confirm that the run signal input is not present before resetting the alarm. Accident may result.
Do not touch drive terminals when energized, even if the drive has stopped. Electric shock may result.
CAUTION
Do not start or stop the drive using the main circuit power. Failure may result.
Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot. Burns may result.
Since the drive can reach high speed operation easily, carefully check the performance of motor or
machine before changing any speed settings. Injury may result.
Do not use the drive braking function for mechanical holding. Injury may result.
iv
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Instructions on Maintenance, Inspection, and Replacement
WARNING
Wait a minimum of five minutes (30HP or less) or ten minutes (40HP or more) after power has been turned
off (open) before starting inspection. Also confirm that the charge lamp is off and that DC voltage between
terminals P(+) and N(-) does not exceed 25V. Electrical shock may result.
Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance, inspection, and replacement operations.
Remove all metal jewelry such as watches and rings. Use insulated tools only. Electric shock or injury
may result.
Instructions on Disposal
CAUTION
Treat as industrial waste when disposing of drive. Injury may result.
Instructions for UL/cUL Requirements
CAUTION
Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before working on this control.
Dangerous voltage exist until charge light is off.
Type1 - indoor use only.
Tightening torque and wire size for field wiring terminal are marked adjacent to the terminal or on
the wiring diagram.
The drive shall be connected with Listed Class J Fuse or Circuit Breaker rated 600V as shown in the
Table 2-3-5 (30 HP or less).
In case of using auxiliary control-power input, connect it by referring to the basic connection
diagram (2-3-1).
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes,
for 230V , 460V.
Use 60/75 C CU wire only.
A Class 2 circuit wired with Class 1 wire (30HP or less). Use Class 1 wire only (40HP or more).
Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop terminal connector
sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector
manufacturer.
Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model.
Other Instructions
WARNING
Never modify the product. Electric shock or injury may result.
v
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe
CAUTION
The contact capacity of alarm output for any fault (30A, B, C) and relay signal output (Y5A, Y5C) is
0.5A at 48V DC, 0.3A ! 250 VAC
The ground terminal (G) should be connected to ground. Use a crimp terminal to connect a cable to
the main circuit terminal or drive ground terminal.
Where a residual-current protective device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect
contact, only a type B device is allowed on the supply side of this electrical equipment. Otherwise,
another protective measure shall be applied such as separation of the electrical equipment from the
environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation of the electrical equipment and supply
system by the transformer.
Use a single cable to connect the (G) drive ground terminal. Do not use two or more drive ground
terminals.
Use only a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) that conform to EN or IEC
standards.
Operate the drive under over-voltage Category III conditions and maintain Pollution Degree 2 or
better as specified in IEC664. To maintain Pollution Degree 2 or better, install the drive in a control
panel structure (level NEMA 3 or higher) which is free from water, oil, carbon, dust, etc.
For the input-output wiring of the drive, use cable diameter and type as specified in Appendix C
in EN60204.
To ensure safety, install an optional AC reactor, DC reactor, or external braking resistor as follows:
1) Install inside an IP4X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are exposed.
2) Install inside an IP2X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are not exposed.
In case of external cooling system, cover the drive rear side in order not to touch the main capacitor
and braking resistor.
General Instructions
For clarity, some figures in this manual may show the drive with covers and safety screens removed for
explanation purposes. Do not operate the device until all such covers and screens have been replaced.
vi
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
AF-300 P11

Model Numbering System Diagram
Description 6K P11 N N (X/N)NN X N X N
GE Product Code
AF-300 Drive Family
Input Voltage
2 = 230V 50/60 Hz
4 = 460V 50/60 Hz
Input Phases
3 = 3 Phase
Horsepower
F50 = 1/2 Hp
010 = 10 Hp
100 = 100 Hp
Factory Installed Options
N = None
X = Keypad
B = to be determined
Enclosure Type
1 = NEMA 1 (UL Type 1)
2 = NEMA 12 (UL Type 12)
4 = NEMA 4 (UL Type 4)
8 = IP00 with NEMA 12 heatsink
9 = IP00
Product Revision
A = 1st Revision
B = 2nd Revision
Minor Product Revision
1 = 1st Minor Revision
2 = 2nd Minor Revision
vii
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
AF-300 P11 Dimensions & Weights
viii
AF-300 P11
HP
Rating
NEMA
Enclosure
Rated Output
Current (A)
Overload
(110% 1min.)
AF-300P11
Model No.
Catalog
No.
Dimensions
H x W x D (inches)
Weight
(lbs)
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 1
0.25 1 1.5 1.7 6KP1123F25X1## D6600 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12 4.8
0.5 1 3 3.3 6KP1123F50X1## D6601 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12 4.8
1 1 5 5.5 6KP1123001X1## D6602 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71 5.5
2 1 8 8.8 6KP1123002X1## D6603 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
3 1 11 12 6KP1123003X1## D6604 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
5 1 17 19 6KP1123005X1## D6605 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
7.5 1 22 24 6KP1123007X1## D6606 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 12.6
10 1 29 32 6KP1123010X1## D6607 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 12.6
15 1 42 46 6KP1123015X1## D6608 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 12.6
20 1 55 61 6KP1123020X1## D6609 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
25 1 67 74 6KP1123025X1## D6610 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
30 1 78 86 6KP1123030X1## D6611 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 23.1
40 1 115 127 6KP1123040X1## D6612 29.7 x 13.5 x 10.0 70
50 1 145 160 6KP1123050X1## D6613 29.7 x 13.5 x 10.0 70
60 1 180 198 6KP1123060X1## D6614 33.1 x 14.9 x 10.6 86
75 1 215 237 6KP1123075X1## D6615 38.0 x 14.9 x 10.6 106
100 1 283 311 6KP1123100X1## D6616 38.0 x 14.9 x 10.6 110
125 1 346 381 6KP1123125X1## D6617 41.3 x 21.0 x 11.2 172
150 1 415 457 6KP1123150X1## D6618 50.4 x 26.9 x 14.2 282
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 4
0.25 4 1.5 1.7 6KP1123F25X4## D6650 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12 4.8
0.5 4 3 3.3 6KP1123F50X4## D6651 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12 4.8
1 4 5 5.5 6KP1123001X4## D6652 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71 5.5
2 4 8 8.8 6KP1123002X4## D6653 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
3 4 11 12 6KP1123003X4## D6654 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
5 4 17 19 6KP1123005X4## D6655 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
7.5 4 22 24 6KP1123007X4## D6656 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 12.6
10 4 29 32 6KP1123010X4## D6657 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 12.6
15 4 42 46 6KP1123015X4## D6658 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 12.6
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 12
20 12 55 61 6KP1123020X2## D6659 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
25 12 67 74 6KP1123025X2## D6660 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
30 12 78 86 6KP1123030X2## D6661 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 23.1
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open
40 Open 115 127 6KP1123040X9## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
50 Open 145 160 6KP1123050X9## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
60 Open 180 198 6KP1123060X9## --- 24.2 x 14.8 x 10.6 79
75 Open 215 237 6KP1123075X9## --- 29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6 97
100 Open 283 311 6KP1123100X9## --- 29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6 101
125 Open 346 381 6KP1123125X9## --- 29.5 x 20.9 x 11.2 154
150 Open 415 457 6KP1123150X9## --- 34.6 x 26.8 x 14.2 253
## Indicates product revision.
Note: Hp rating is shown for 230V and 460V nominal systems.
When applying at lower voltage, select the drive by rated current and not Hp rating.
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
AF-300 P11 Dimensions & Weights
ix
AF-300 P11
HP
Rating
NEMA
Enclosure
Rated Output
Current (A)
Overload
(110% 1min.)
AF-300P11
Model No.
Catalog
No.
Dimensions
H x W x D (inches)
Weight
(lbs)
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open with NEMA 12 Heatsink
40 Open 115 127 6KP1123040X8## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
50 Open 145 160 6KP1123050X8## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
60 Open 180 198 6KP1123060X8## --- 24.2 x 14.8 x 10.6 79
75 Open 215 237 6KP1123075X8## --- 29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6 97
100 Open 283 311 6KP1123100X8## --- 29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6 101
125 Open 346 381 6KP1123125X8## --- 29.5 x 20.9 x 11.2 154
150 Open 415 457 6KP1123150X8## --- 34.6 x 26.8 x 14.2 253
460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 1
0.5 1 1.5 1.7 6KP1143F50X1## D6649 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12 4.8
1 1 2.5 2.8 6KP1143001X1## D6619 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71 5.5
2 1 3.7 4.1 6KP1143002X1## D6620 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
3 1 5.5 6.1 6KP1143003X1## D6621 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
5 1 9 9.9 6KP1143005X1## D6622 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
7.5 1 12.5 14 6KP1143007X1## D6623 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 13.4
10 1 16.5 18 6KP1143010X1## D6624 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 13.4
15 1 23 25 6KP1143015X1## D6625 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 13.4
20 1 30 33 6KP1143020X1## D6626 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
25 1 37 41 6KP1143025X1## D6627 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
30 1 44 48 6KP1143030X1## D6628 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 23.1
40 1 60 66 6KP1143040X1## D6630 29.7 x 13.5 x 10.0 70
50 1 75 83 6KP1143050X1## D6631 29.7 x 13.5 x 10.0 70
60 1 91 100 6KP1143060X1## D6632 29.7 x 14.9 x 10.6 82
75 1 112 123 6KP1143075X1## D6633 34.6 x 14.9 x 10.6 95
100 1 150 165 6KP1143100X1## D6634 34.6 x 14.9 x 10.6 97
125 1 176 194 6KP1143125X1## D6635 38.0 x 14.9 x 10.6 115
150 1 210 231 6KP1143150X1## D6636 38.0 x 21.0 x 12.4 174
200 1 253 278 6KP1143200X1## D6637 38.0 x 21.0 x 12.4 174
250 1 304 334 6KP1143250X1## D6638 53.1 x 21.0 x 14.2 245
300 1 377 415 6KP1143300X1## D6639 53.1 x 21.0 x 14.2 245
350 1 415 457 6KP1143350X1## D6640 55.1 x 26.9 x 14.2 337
400 1 485 534 6KP1143400X1## D6641 55.1 x 26.9 x 14.2 337
450 1 520 572 6KP1143450X1## D6642 55.1 x 26.9 x 14.2 337
500 1 650 715 6KP1143500X1## D6643 57.1 x 26.8 x 17.7 562
600 1 740 814 6KP1143600X1## D6644 57.1 x 26.8 x 17.7 562
700 1 840 924 6KP1143700X1## D6645 57.1 x 34.6 x 17.7 804
800 1 960 1056 6KP1143800X1## D6646 57.1 x 34.6 x 17.7 804
460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 4
0.5 4 1.5 1.7 6KP1143F50X4## D6699 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12 4.8
1 4 2.5 2.8 6KP1143001X4## D6669 10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71 5.5
2 4 3.7 4.1 6KP1143002X4## D6670 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
3 4 5.5 6.1 6KP1143003X4## D6671 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
5 4 9 9.9 6KP1143005X4## D6672 10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71 8.4
7.5 4 12.5 14 6KP1143007X4## D6673 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 13.4
10 4 16.5 18 6KP1143010X4## D6674 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 13.4
15 4 23 25 6KP1143015X4## D6675 10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68 13.4
## Indicates product revision.
Note: Hp rating is shown for 230V and 460V nominal systems.
When applying at lower voltage, select the drive by rated current and not Hp rating.
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
AF-300 P11 Dimensions & Weights
x
AF-300 P11
HP
Rating
NEMA
Enclosure
Rated Output
Current (A)
Overload
(110% 1min.)
AF-300P11
Model No.
Catalog
No.
Dimensions
H x W x D (inches)
Weight
(lbs)
460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 12
20 12 30 33 6KP1143020X2## D6676 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
25 12 37 41 6KP1143025X2## D6677 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 22.0
30 12 44 48 6KP1143030X2## D6678 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68 23.1
460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open
40 Open 60 66 6KP1143040X9## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
50 Open 75 83 6KP1143050X9## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
60 Open 91 100 6KP1143060X9## --- 21.7 x 14.8 x 10.6 75
75 Open 112 123 6KP1143075X9## --- 26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6 86
100 Open 150 165 6KP1143100X9## --- 26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6 88
125 Open 176 194 6KP1143125X9## --- 29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6 106
150 Open 210 231 6KP1143150X9## --- 29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4 154
200 Open 253 278 6KP1143200X9## --- 29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4 154
250 Open 304 334 6KP1143250X9## --- 39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2 220
300 Open 377 415 6KP1143300X9## --- 39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2 220
350 Open 415 457 6KP1143350X9## --- 39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2 308
400 Open 485 534 6KP1143400X9## --- 39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2 308
450 Open 520 572 6KP1143450X9## --- 39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2 308
500 Open 650 715 6KP1143500X9## --- 55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7 551
600 Open 740 814 6KP1143600X9## --- 55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7 551
700 Open 840 924 6KP1143700X9## --- 55.1 x 35.6 x 17.7 793
800 Open 960 1056 6KP1143800X9## --- 55.1 x 35.6 x 17.7 793
460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open with NEMA 12 Heatsink
40 Open 60 66 6KP1143040X8## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
50 Open 75 83 6KP1143050X8## --- 21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0 64
60 Open 91 100 6KP1143060X8## --- 21.7 x 14.8 x 10.6 75
75 Open 112 123 6KP1143075X8## --- 26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6 86
100 Open 150 165 6KP1143100X8## --- 26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6 88
125 Open 176 194 6KP1143125X8## --- 29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6 106
150 Open 210 231 6KP1143150X8## --- 29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4 154
200 Open 253 278 6KP1143200X8## --- 29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4 154
250 Open 304 334 6KP1143250X8## --- 39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2 220
300 Open 377 415 6KP1143300X8## --- 39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2 220
350 Open 415 457 6KP1143350X8## --- 39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2 308
400 Open 485 534 6KP1143400X8## --- 39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2 308
450 Open 520 572 6KP1143450X8## --- 39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2 308
500 Open 650 715 6KP1143500X8## --- 55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7 551
600 Open 740 814 6KP1143600X8## --- 55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7 551
700 Open 840 924 6KP1143700X8## --- 55.1 x 35.6 x 17.7 793
800 Open 960 1056 6KP1143800X8## --- 55.1 x 35.6 x 17.7 793
## Indicates product revision.
Note: Hp rating is shown for 230V and 460V nominal systems.
When applying at lower voltage, select the drive by rated current and not Hp rating.
1-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
1. Before Using This Product
1.1 Receiving Instructions
40 HP or more
Lifting
Holes
(4 holes
total)
Ratings
Nameplate
Surface Cover
Keypad Panel
Mounting screws of surface cover
Keypad Panel
Surface
cover
Intermediate cover
Ratings nameplate
30 HP or less
Ratings Nameplate
Unpack and check the product as explained below.
If you have any questions about the product, contact GE
Drives or your local GE Drives distributor.
1. Check the ratings nameplate to confirm that the
delivered product is the one that was ordered.
2. Check for damaged and/or missing parts upon delivery.
3. In addition to the drive unit and this manual, the package contains rubber bushings (for products with 30 Hp or less)
and a terminating resistor (1/2 W, 120 ohm). The terminating resistors for products with 30 Hp or less are packaged
separately. The terminating resistors for products with 40HP or more are installed internal to the drive unit. To
connect the internal terminating resistor, place hardware jumper J2 to the ON position. This terminating resistor is
required for RS485 RTU communication.
4. On drives rated 100 Hp and larger, a separately mounted DC Link Reactor is provided. The reactor should be
checked for proper rating before installation.
1.2 Appearance
SER. No. : 9 9 1 0 - 0 0 0 1 2 M 0 0 01
Production lot serial number
Production week: Fiscal week (01 to 53)
Production year: Last two digits of year (99 = 1999)
Mounting screws of
surface cover
(Total of 6 screws)
1-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
1.3 Handling the Product
(1) Removing the Cover
For drives 30HP or less, loosen the cover mounting screws, then remove the cover by pulling from the top (see Figure
1.3.1).
Fig.1-3-1 Removing the Cover (for drives of 30HP or less)
For drives 40HP or more, first remove the six cover mounting screws, then remove the cover.
Fig.1-3-2 Removing the Cover (for drives of 40HP or more)
(2) Removing the Keypad Panel
After removing the cover as explained in (1), loosen the keypad panel mounting screws and remove as shown in Figure
1.3.3 for drives 30HP or less.
Fig.1-3-3 Removing the Keypad Panel (for drives of 30 HP or less)
For drives 40HP or more, loosen the keypad panel mounting screws and remove, using the finger holds on the keypad
panel case.
Mounting screws of service
cover (6 positions total)
Mounting screws of
Keypad panel
Keypad panel case
Fig.1-3-4 Removing the Keypad Panel (for drives 40HP or more)
1-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
1.4 Carrying
Carry the product by the main unit. Do not carry the product by its cover or parts other than the main unit. Use a crane or
hoist to carry a product equipped with hanging holes.
1.5 Storage
Temporary Storage
Temporary storage of this product must meet the conditions listed in Table 1-5-1.
Table 1-5-1 Storage Environment
Item Specifications
Ambient Temperature -10 to +50C
(+14 to +122F)
Condensation or freezing, as a result of sudden temperature
changes, must not occur.
Storage Temperature -25 to +65C
1
(-4 to +149F)
Relative Humidity 5 to 95%
2
Atmosphere The standard product must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive
gas, flammable gas, oil mist, vapor, water drops, or vibration. The salt content
in the atmosphere should be minimized.
Note 1: The storage temperature applies only to short periods of time, such as during transport. Refer to comments on
extended storage guidelines.
Note 2: Since a large change in temperature within this humidity range may result in condensation or freezing, do not
store where such temperature changes may occur.
1. Do not place this product directly on the floor.
2. To store the product in an extreme environment, pack in vinyl sheeting, etc.
3. If the product is stored in a high-humidity environment, insert a drying agent (e.g., silica gel) and pack the product in
vinyl sheeting.
Long-term Storage
If the product is to be stored for an extended period of time after purchase, the method of storage depends primarily on
the storage location.
The general long-term storage method is as follows:
1. The above conditions for temporary storage must be satisfied.If the storage period exceeds three months, the upper
limit of ambient temperature must be reduced to 30C (86F) to prevent the deterioration of the electrolytic capaci-
tors.
2. Pack the product thoroughly to eliminate exposure to moisture and include a drying agent to ensure a relative
humidity of about 70% or less.
3. Do not leave the product mounted in a control panel and exposed to the elements like moisture or dust (particularly
on a construction site). In this case, remove the product and store in a suitable environment.
4. Electrolytic capacitors will deteriorate if not provided with power for an extended period of time. Do not store
electrolytic capacitors for one year or longer without providing power.
1-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
1.6 AF-300 P11 Drive Ratings Efficiency and Watts Loss
HP Rating
Rated Output
Current (A)
Rated Output
Power (KVA)
Efficiency at 2KHz
(%)
Efficiency at
15KHz (%)
Watts Loss at
2KHz (W)
Watts Loss at
15KHz (W) Internal DB (W)
230VAC
0.25 1.5 0.59 92.0 90.5 25 30 N/A
0.5 3 1.1 93.5 91.7 35 45 N/A
1 5 1.9 94.9 94.0 50 60 N/A
2 8 3.1 95.7 94.1 80 110 N/A
3 11 4.3 95.9 94.9 110 140 N/A
5 17 6.7 96.2 95.4 170 210 N/A
7.5 22 8.7 96.2 95.2 210 280 N/A
10 29 11 96.5 95.3 290 370 N/A
15 42 16 96.4 95.2 410 550 N/A
20 55 21 96.9 95.9 500 670 N/A
25 67 26 96.8 95.8 630 840 N/A
30 78 31 96.5 95.5 770 1030 N/A
2KHz (%) 10KHz (%) 2KHz (W) 10KHz (W)
40 115 45 97.2 96.8 950 1100 N/A
50 145 57 97.0 96.7 1250 1400 N/A
60 180 71 97.1 96.6 1500 1750 N/A
75 215 85 97.3 96.6 1700 1950 N/A
100 283 112 97.4 97.0 2200 2500 N/A
2KHz (%) 6KHz (%) 2KHz (W) 6KHz (W)
125 346 137 97.4 97.2 2650 2800 N/A
150 415 165 97.4 97.3 3200 3350 N/A
460VAC
0.5 1.5 1.1 93.5 89.3 35 60 N/A
1 2.5 1.9 95.4 91.7 45 85 N/A
2 3.7 2.9 96.7 94.1 60 110 N/A
3 5.5 4.3 97.0 94.5 80 150 N/A
5 9 7.1 97.1 95.0 130 230 N/A
7.5 12.5 9.9 97.3 95.3 160 290 N/A
10 16.5 13.1 97.3 95.4 210 370 N/A
15 23 18.3 97.6 95.9 300 520 N/A
20 30 23.9 97.9 96.5 360 610 N/A
25 37 29.4 97.8 96.4 460 770 N/A
30 44 35 97.8 96.4 530 870 N/A
2KHz (%) 10KHz (%) 2KHz (W) 10KHz (W)
40 60 47 97.8 96.9 750 1050 N/A
50 75 59 97.7 96.9 950 1300 N/A
60 91 72 97.8 97.0 1100 1550 N/A
75 112 89 97.8 97.0 1350 1900 N/A
100 150 119 97.8 97.1 1800 2450 N/A
2KHz (%) 6KHz (%) 2KHz (W) 6KHz (W)
125 176 140 98.1 97.8 1850 2200 N/A
150 210 167 98.0 97.8 2400 2750 N/A
200 253 202 98.0 97.7 2900 3350 N/A
250 304 242 98.1 97.8 3250 3800 N/A
300 377 300 98.1 97.8 4250 4900 N/A
350 415 330 98.2 97.9 4350 5100 N/A
400 485 386 98.1 97.8 5100 5900 N/A
450 520 414 98.1 97.8 5700 6650 N/A
500 650 518 98.2 97.9 6900 8050 N/A
600 740 590 98.1 97.8 8050 9350 N/A
700 840 669 98.2 97.9 8900 10400 N/A
800 960 765 98.1 97.8 10300 12100 N/A
2-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
2. Installation Environment and Connection
2.1 Operating Environment
Install this product in a location that meets the condi-
tions listed in Table 2-1-1.
Table 2-1-1 Operating Environment
Item Specifications
Location Indoors
Ambient
Temperature
-10 to +50C (+14 to +122F) - for products of
30 HP or less, the ventilating covers must be
removed if ambient temperature exceeds
+40C (104F), NEMA Type 4 & 12 Unit -10 to
+40C (+14 to +104F)
Relative
Humidity
5 to 95% (No condensation).
Atmosphere The product must not be exposed to dust,
direct sunlight, corrosive gas, oil mist, vapor, or
water. There must be a minimum salt content in
the atmosphere. Do not store where
condensation may occur as a result of sudden
changes in temperature.
Altitude 1000 m (3300 feet) or lower - For altitude above
1000 m (3300 feet), see Table 2-1-2.
Vibration 3mm peak from 2 to 9Hz, 9.8m/s2 from 9 to 20Hz,
2m/s2 from 20-55Hz, 1m/s2 from 55 to 200Hzs.
2.2 Installation Method
1. Securely fasten the product in an upright position on
a solid structure with the tag AF-300 P11 facing the
front. Do not turn the product upside down or install
in a horizontal position. Fig. 2-2-1
2. Since heat is generated during drive operation, the
spaces shown in Fig. 2-2-1 are required to ensure
sufficient cooling. Do not install the product beneath
a device sensitive to heat as heat radiates upward.
3. The heat sink may reach a temperature of 90C
(+194F) during drive operation. Ensure that the
material surrounding the product can withstand this
temperature.
WARNING
Install this product on nonflammable material such as
metal.
4. When installing this product in a control panel,
consider ventilation to prevent the drives ambient
temperature from exceeding the specified value. Do
not install the product in an area from which heat
cannot be sufficiently released.
5. If two or more drives must be installed in the same
device or control panel, arrange the units horizontally
to minimize the effect of heat. If two or more drives
must be installed vertically, place an insulated plate
between the drives to minimize the effect of heat.
6. When shipped from the factory, drives provide
internal cooling inside the panel. A drive of 30HP or
less can be converted to external cooling simply by
adding an optional mounting adapter.
CAUTION
Ensure that the drive and heat sink surfaces are kept
free of foreign matter such as lint, paper dust, small
chips of wood or metal, and dust. Fire or accident
may result.
Table 2-1-2 Output current reduction rate based on
altitude
Altitude Output current
reduction rate
3300 feet 1
(1000m or lower)
3300-4950 feet 0.97
(1000-1500m)
4950-6600 feet 0.95
(1500-2000m)
6600-8250 feet 0.91
(2000-2500m)
8250-9900 feet 0.88
(2500-3000m)
AF-300 P11 Drive
Top
Bottom
Left Right
X X
4 (100mm)
4 (100mm)
Fig. 2-2-1 30 HP or less: Gap X can be
0. (side-by-side installation) 40HP or
more: Gap X >= 2.0 (50mm)
Internal
Heat
Dissipation
(30%)
External
Heat
Dissipation
(70%)
Cooling fan
Heatsink
External
air supply
Internal
air supply
Internal
fan
Fig. 2-2-2 Through Panel Mount
2-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
A drive of 40HP or more can be converted to external
cooling simply by moving the upper and lower mounting
brackets as shown in Fig. 2-2-3. Remove the M6 bracket
screws, move the brackets, then secure the brackets
using the M5 case mounting screws. (The bracket screws
are no longer required after changing the bracket mount-
ing position.)

Fig. 2-2-3
In an external cooling system, a heat sink radiating about
70% of total drive heat (total loss) can be placed outside
the device or control panel, as shown in Fig. 2-2-2.
7. For drives of 30HP or less, remove the ventilating
covers if ambient temperature exceeds +40C (104F).
1. Removing the Ventilating Covers
One ventilating cover is mounted on top of the drive and
two or three are mounted at the bottom. Remove the
main cover and then remove ventilating covers by
popping out the cover inserts as shown in Fig. 2-2-4.

Fig. 2-2-4 Removing the ventilating cover
Bracket Screws (M6)
Case mounting
screws (M5)
10 screws total
Mounting
Mounting
bracket
Fig.2.2.5
Fig. 2.2.6
Installation of Open Type with NEMA 12 Heatsink Drive
(40 Hp and above)
1. Remove adhesive protection strip from gasket and
then mount gasket to panel/enclosure, carefully
aligning cutout and mounting holes.
2. Install the drive unit and tighten the mounting bolt
and nut. (Tightening torque: 119 lbs-inch [M8], 425
lbs-inch [M12] ). Mounting hardware to be supplied
by customer. (refer to figure 2.2.5)
3. After proper torque has been applied to all mounting
hardware, seal the outside end of the hardware with
silicon glue. Silicon glue to be supplied by the
customer. (Refer to Fig. 2.2.6)
2-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
2.3 Connection
Remove the main cover before connecting the terminal blocks as follows.
2-3-1 Basic Connection
1. Always connect power to the L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T main circuit power terminals on the drive. Connecting power to
another terminal will damage the drive. Check that the input voltage is within the maximum allowable voltage marked
on the nameplate, etc.
2. Always wire the ground terminal to ground to prevent problems such as fire or electric shock and to minimize noise.
3. Use a reliable crimp terminal for connection between a power terminal and a power wire.
4. After terminating the wiring connection, confirm the following:
a. Confirm that the connection is correct.
b. Confirm that all necessary connections have been made.
c. Confirm that there is no short-circuit or ground fault between the terminals and wire.
5. Connection modification after power-on.
The smoothing capacitor in the direct current portion of the main circuit cannot be discharged immediately after the
power is turned off. To insure safety, use a multimeter to check that the direct current (DC) voltage is lowered to the
safety range (25V DC or less) after the charge lamp goes off. Also, confirm that the voltage is zero before short-
circuiting. The residual voltage (electric charge) may cause sparks.
WARNING
Always connect a ground wire. Electric shock or fire may result. Ensure that a trained specialist
performs all wiring. Confirm that the power is turned off (open) before beginning any wiring operations.
Electrical shock may result.
2-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated
(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.
(*2) Use as required.
(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.
(*4) Remove the jumper wire between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.
(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)
(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.
Connect them as shown in the figure above.
(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.
(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.
(*9) If using V2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.
(*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer.
2.3.1 Basic Connection Diagram (Sink Logic)
20 Hp and above Up to 15 Hp
2-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Sink Logic)
See page 2-4 for notes
20 Hp and above Up to 15 Hp
2-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Basic Connection Diagram (Source Logic, Typically used in Europe)
Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated
(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.
(*2) Use as required.
(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.
(*4) Remove the jumper wire between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.
(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option) when connecting the external braking resistor (option).
(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.
Connect them as shown in the figure above.
(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.
(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.
(*9) If using V2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.
(*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer.
20 Hp and above Up to 15 Hp
2-7
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Source logic, Typically used in Europe)
See page 2-6 for notes
20 Hp and above Up to 15 Hp
2-8
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
2.3.2 Connecting the Main Circuit and Ground Terminals
Table 2.3.1 Functions of main circuit terminals and ground termnals
Symbol Terminal Name Description
L1/R,L2/S,L3/T Main circuit power terminals Connects a 3-phase power supply
U,V,W Inverter output terminals Connects a 3-phase motor
R0,T0 Input terminals for auxiliary control power Connects a backup AC power supply to the control
circuit (not supported for drives of 1 Hp or less)
P1,P(+) DC reactor terminals Connects the optional power correcting DC reactor
P(+),DB Terminals for external braking resistor Connects the optional external braking resistor (for
drives of 15 Hp or less)
P(+),N(-) Terminals for DC link circuit Supplies DC link circuit voltage to the external
braking unit (option) or power regeneration unit
(option).
G Ground terminal Connects the drive chassis (case) to ground.
Drives 7.5 HP and larger
Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V
460 VAC Input Voltage 66 ft (20 m) 328 ft (100 m) 1312 ft (400 m) *
230 VAC Input Voltage 1312 ft (400 m) * 1312 ft (400 m) * 1312 ft (400 m) *
Drives 5 HP and smaller
Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V
460 VAC Input Voltage 66 ft (20 m) 165 ft (50 m) * 165 ft (50 m) *
230 VAC Input Voltage 328 ft (100 m) * 328 ft (100 m) * 328 ft (100 m) *
* For this case the cable length is determined by secondary effects and not voltage spiking.
Note: When a motor protective thermal O/L relay is inserted between the drive and the motor, the thermal O/L relay may
malfunction (particularly in the 460V series), even when the cable length is 165 feet (50m) or less. To correct, insert a
filter or reduce the carrier frequency. (Use function code F26 Motor sound.)
(1) Main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T)
1. Connect these terminals to the power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker or ground-leakage circuit breaker for
circuit protection. Phase-sequence matching is unnecessary.
2. To insure safety, a magnetic contactor should be used to disconnect the drive from the power supply when the drive
protective function activates.
3. Use control circuit terminal FWD/REV or the RUN/STOP key on the keypad panel to start or stop the drive. The main
circuit power should be used to start or stop the drive only if absolutely necessary and then should not be used
more than once every hour.
4. If you need to connect these terminals to a single-phase power supply, please contact the factory.
(2) Drive output terminals (U, V, W)
1. Connect these terminals to a 3-phase motor in the correct phase sequence. If the direction of motor rotation is
incorrect, exchange any two of the U, V, and W phases.
2. Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the drive output.
3. If the cable from the drive to the motor is very long, a high-frequency current may be generated by stray capacitance
between the cables and result in an overcurrent trip of the drive, an increase in leakage current, or a reduction in
current indication precision.
When a motor is driven by a PWM-type drive, the motor terminals may be subject to surge voltage generated by drive
element switching. If the motor cable (with 460V series motors, in particular) is particularly long, surge voltage will
deteriorate motor insulation. To prevent this, use the following guidelines:
2-9
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(3) Input terminals for auxiliary control power
(R0 and T0)
The drive operates even if power is not provided to these
terminals. If a protective circuit operates, and the mag-
netic contactor on the drives power is opened (off), the
inverter control circuit power, the alarm output (30A, B,
and C), and the keypad panel display goes off. To prevent
this, the main circuit AC power must also be supplied as
auxiliary control power to the auxiliary control power input
terminals (R0 and T0).
1. To ensure effective noise reduction when using a
radio noise filter, the output power from the filter must go
to the auxiliary control power input terminals. If these
terminals are connected to the input side of the filter, the
noise reduction effect deteriorates.
(4) DC reactor terminals (P1 and P(+))
1. Before connecting a power factor correcting DC
reactor (optional) to these terminals, remove the
factory-installed jumper.
2. If a DC reactor is not used, do not remove the jumper.
Note: For drives of 100 Hp or more, the DC reactor is
provided as a separate standard component and should
always be connected to the terminals. DC reactor is
provided as open type, enclosure to be provided by other.
CAUTION
A DC reactor does not come with drives rated less
than 100 Hp, however, use a DC reactor or AC
reactor under the following conditions otherwise the
drive may be damaged or malfunction.
1) Used when the capacity of the power supply trans-
former exceeds 500k VA and exceeds the rated
capacity of the drive tenfold.
2. Used when a thyrister converter is connected as a
common load on the same transformer.
3. Used to prevent a drive OV trip from occuring when
the power factor capacitor in the power line is
switched on and off.
4. Used when the voltage imbalance exceds 3%.
(5) Terminals for external braking resistor (P(+) and
DB) (15 Hp or less)
The P11 drive 15 Hp or less, does not contain a braking
resistor. To improve braking performance, an external
braking resistor must be installed.
1. Connect terminals P(+) and DB on the external
braking resistor to terminals P(+) and DB on the drive.
2. The wiring length (twisted pair cables, etc.) should
not exceed 16.5 feet (5m).
(6) Terminals for DC link circuit (P(+) and N(-))
The P11 drive of 20 Hp or more, does not contain a drive
circuit for the braking resistor. To improve braking
performance, an external braking unit (option) and an
external braking resistor (option) must be installed.
1. Connect terminals P(+) and N(-) on the braking unit to
terminals P(+) and N(-) on the drive. The wiring length
(twisted pair cables, etc.) should not exceed 16.5 feet
(5m).
2. Connect terminals P(+) and DB on the braking
resistor to terminals P(+) and DB on the braking unit.
The wiring length (twisted pair cables, etc.) should
not exceed 33 feet (10m). If terminals P(+) and N(-) on
the drive are not used, leave the terminals open. If
P(+) is connected to N(-), or the braking resistor is
connected directly, the resistor will burn up.
3. Auxiliary contacts 1 and 2 of the braking unit have
polarity.
4. Refer to DB unit instruction book for paralleled
resistors.
Note: Braking units and resistors are rated on degree of
braking, duration and system frequency of braking cycle.
Verify units meet application requirements.
Imbalance rate
between phase [%] =
(Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V]
3-phase average voltage [V]
x 100%
Fig. 2-3-2 Connection the auxiliary control-power input terminals
Fig. 2-3-3
Fig. 2-3-4 Connection (15 Hp or less)
2-10
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Fig. 2-3-6
Factory Shipment Status Connector CN UX: U1
<Enlarged view of part A>
<3D view of part A>
When shipped from the
factory, CN UX is con-
nected to the U1 side.
RO-TO L1/R-L3T
U1 U2
+
CN UX (red)
Fig. 2-3-5 Connection 20 Hp or more, 100 Hp or more
parallel resistors, 200 Hp or more parallel braking units.
(7) Ground terminal
The grounding connector should be sized in accordance
with the NEC or Canadian Electrical Code. The connec-
tion should be made by a UL listed or CSA certified
closed-loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge
involved. The connector is to be fixed using the crimp tool
specified by the connector manufacturer.
(8) Auxiliary power switching connector (CN UX) (for
drives of 40 Hp or more)
When a drive of 40 Hp or more requires main circuit
power voltage as listed below, disconnect the auxiliary
power switching connector CN UX from U1 and connect
to U2. For the switching method, see Fig. 2-3-6.
Table 2-3-3 Main Voltage Requiring Auxiliary Power Switching Connector
Frequency [Hz] Power Voltage Range [VAC]
50 380 - 398
60 380 - 430
CN UX
CAUTION
Check that the number of phases and rated
voltage match those of the AC power supply.
Do not connect the AC power supply to the
output terminals (U, V, W). Injury may result.
Do not directly connect a braking resistor to
the DC terminals (P[+] and N[-]). Fire may
result.
The switching connectors are mounted on the power PCB
above the control PCB as shown on the right.
Note: To remove a connector, unlock the connector (using
the locking mechanism) and pull. To install, firmly push the
connector until it clicks into place.
2-11
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
2.3.3 Connecting the Control Terminals
Table 2.3.3 lists the functions of the control circuit terminals. A control circuit terminal should be connected according
to its function setting.
Table 2-3-3
Terminal
Classification Symbol Terminal Name Function
Analog input 13 Potentiometer power supply Used for +10V DC power supply for frequency setting POT
(resistance of 1 to 5k Ohms)
12 Voltage input 1. Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage
supplied from an external circuit.
- 0 to +10V DC / 0 to 100%
- Reversible operation using positive and negative signals:
0 to +/- 10V DC / 0 to 100%
- Reverse operation: +10 to 0V DC / 0 to 100%
2. Input feedback signal for PID control is input.
3. The analog input value from the external circuit is used
for torque control
* Input resistance: 22 k Ohms
V2 Voltage input Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage
supplied from an external circuit.
- 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100%
- Reverse operation: +10 to 0V DC/0 to 100%
* Use only one terminal - V2 or C1 Exclusively
* Input resistance: 22 k Ohms
C1 Current input 1. Frequency is set according to the analog input current supplied
from an external circuit.
- 4 to 20mA DC / 0 to 100%
- Reverse operation: 20 to 4mA DC / 0 to 100%
2. The feedback signal for PID control is input.
3. PTC thermistor input
* Use only one terminal - V2 or C1 Exclusively
* Input resistance: 250 Ohms
* PTC switch is off when PTC function is not used
11 Analog input common Common terminal for analog input signals
2-12
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Digital input FWD Forward operation / Used for forward operation (when FWD-CM is on) or
Stop command deceleration and stop (when FWD-CM is opened)
REV Reverse operation / Used for reverse operation (when REV-CM is on) or
Stop command deceleration and stop (when REV-CM is opened)
X1 Digital input 1 The coast-to-stop command, external alarm, alarm reset, multi-
step frequency selection, and other functions (from an external
circuit) can be assigned to terminals X1 to X9. For details, see
"Setting the Terminal Functions E01 to E09" in Section 5.2
Function Explanation.
<Specifications of digital input circuit>
X2 Digital input 2
X3 Digital input 3
X4 Digital input 4
X5 Digital input 5
X6 Digital input 6
X7 Digital input 7
X8 Digital input 8
X9 Digital input 9
P24 Control Unit power Supply +24VDC power supply for control input. Maximum output current 100mA
PLC PLC signal power Used to connect PLC power supply for output signals; rated nominal
voltage = 24 VDC (22 to 27 V DC range) at sink logic operation.
CM Digital input common Common terminal for digital input signals and P24
Analog output FMA Analog monitor Outputs monitor signal using analog DC voltage 0 to +10V DC.
The signal indicates one of the following:
(11: common - Output frequency (before slip compensation)
terminal) - Load factor
- Output frequency (after slip compensation)
- Power consumption
- Output current
- PID feedback value
- Output voltage
- PG feedback value
- Output torque
- DC link circuit voltage
* Connectable impedance: min. 5k ohms
Pulse output FMP Frequency monitor Outputs a monitor signal using the pulse waveform.
(CM: common (pulse waveform output) This signal has the same function as the FMA signal.
terminal)
Item min. typ. max.
Operating voltage ON 0V 2V
OFF 22V 24V 27V
Maximum load current ON 3.2mA 4.5 mA
Leakage current OFF 0.5 mA
2-13
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(1) Analog input terminals (13, 12, C1, and 11)
1. These terminals receive low level analog signals that
may be affected by external noise. The cables must
be as short as possible (20 meters or less), must be
shielded, and the shields must be grounded. If the
cables are affected by external induction noise, the
shielding effect may be improved by connecting the
shield to terminal [11].
2. If contacts must be connected to these circuits, twin
(bifurcated) contacts for handling low level signals
must be used. A contact must not be connected to
terminal [11].
3. If an external analog signal output device is con-
nected to these terminals, it may malfunction as a
result of drive noise. To prevent malfunction, connect
a ferrite core or capacitor to the external analog
signal output device.
Item min. typ. max.
Operating voltage ON 1V 2V
OFF 24V 27V
Maximum load current ON 50 mA
Leakage current OFF 0.1 mA
Fig. 2-3-10 Example of Noise Prevention
VR
1k to
5K ohms
Drive
13
12
11
Shielded wires
Fig. 2-3-9
Transistor Y1 Transistor output 1 A running signal, frequency equivalence signal, overload early
warning output signal, and other signals from the drive are output
(as transistor output) to arbitrary ports. For details, see "Setting the
Terminal Functions E20 to E23" in Section 5.2 Function Explanation.
* <Specifications of transistor output circuit>
Y2 Transistor output 2
Y3 Transistor output 3
Y4 Transistor output 4
CMY Transistor output common Common terminal for transistor output signals. This terminal is
insulated from terminals (CM) and [11].
Relay output 30A,30B,30C Alarm outputs for any fault. If the drive is stopped by an alarm (protective function), the alarm
signal is output from the relay contact output terminal (1SPDT).
Contact rating: 250 VAC, 0.3A,cos = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5A for CE
Marking
An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal
operation) can be selected.
Y5A,Y5C Multi-purpose signal These signals can be output similar to the Y1 to Y4 signals above.
The contact rating is the same as that of the alarm output above.
Communic- DX+,DX RTU communication Input / output signal terminals for RTU communication input / output
ation Up to 31 inverters can be connected using the daisy chain method.
SD Communication cable Terminal for connecting the cable shield. The terminal is electrically
shield connection terminal floating.-
2-14
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(2) Digital input terminals (FWD, REV, X1 to X9, PLC,
and CM)
1. Digital input terminals (e.g., FWD, REV, X1 to X9) are
generally turned on or off by connecting or discon-
necting the line to or from the CM terminal.
If digital input terminals are turned on or off by
switching the PLCs open collector output using an
external power supply, a resulting bypass circuit may
cause the drive to malfunction. To prevent a malfunc-
tion, connect the PLC terminal as shown in Fig. 2-3-
11.
Fig. 2-3-12 The Control Wiring Route
Fig. 2-3-13 Securing Positions for Inverter Control Circuit Wiring (40 HP or more)
Fig. 2-3-11 Prevention of Bypass Current by External Power
2. When using a contact input, a high-quality relay with
reliable contacts must be used.
(3) Transistor output terminals (Y1 to Y4, CMY)
1. These terminals have a circuit configuration as shown
in Table 2-3-3, "Transistor Output". Confirm the
polarity of the external power supply.
2. To connect a control relay, connect a surge absorbing
diode to both ends of its exciting coil.
(4) Sink or Source Logic Selection.
1. Set SWI for Sink or Source Connection to the PLC.
The factory default setting is Sink and this instruction
manual explains Sink logic function only.
2. When you need to connect source type logic, refer to
Basic Connection Diagram Fig. 2-3-3 and Fig. 2-3-4
and Technical Information Manual. (Sink Logic is
commonly used in the USA and Source Logic is
commonly used in Europe.)
(5) Others
1. To prevent a malfunction as a result of noise, control
terminal cables must be placed as far as possible
from the main circuit cables.
2. The control cables inside the inverter must be
secured to prevent direct contact with the main circuit
(e.g., main circuit terminal block).
wiring
Cable ties
Cable
binding
Hole A
Cable binding
Hole B
(6) Wiring of control circuit (inverter of 40 Hp or more)
1. Pull out the control circuit wiring along the left panel
as shown in Fig. 2-3-12.
2. Secure the cable to cable binding hole A (on the left
wall of the main circuit terminal block) using a cable-
tie
(e.g., Insulock). The cable-tie must not exceed 0.14"
(3.5mm) in width and 0.06" (1.5mm) in thickness.
3. When the optional PC board is mounted, the signal
lines must be secured to cable binding hole B.
WARNING
Control lines generally do not have enhanced
insulation. If the insulation of a control line is
damaged, the control signals may be exposed to
high voltage in the main circuit. The Low Voltage
Directive in Europe also restricts the exposure to
high voltage. Electric shock may result
CAUTION
The inverter, motor, and cables generate noise.
Check that the ambient sensors and devices do
not malfunction. Accident may result.
2-15
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Screw size G = M10
Other terminals = M12
2.3.4 Terminal Configuration
(1) Main circuit terminals
1/4 to 1 Hp 230 VAC
1/2 to 1 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M3.5
2 to 5 Hp 230 VAC
2 to 5 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M4
7.5 to 15 Hp 230 VAC
7.5 to 15 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M5
20 to 30 Hp 230 VAC
20 to 30 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M6
40 to 50 Hp 230 VAC
40 to 100 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M4
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N() U V W
G
G
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N() U V W
G G
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N() U V W
G G
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N() U V W
G
G
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N()
U V W
R0 T0
G G
Screw size M8
Screw size M3.5
Screw size M3.5
Screw size M3.5
P(+) N()
60 To 100 Hp 230 VAC
125 to 200 Hp 460 VAC
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1
U V W R0 T0
Screw size G = M8
Other terminals = M10
125 Hp 230 VAC
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-) U V W
G G
G G
Screw size M4
Screw size G = M10
Other terminals = M12
150 Hp 230 VAC
250 to 450 Hp 460 VAC
R0 T0
Screw size M4
L1/R L2/S L3/T U V W
P1
P(+) N(-)
Screw size G = M10
Other terminals = M12
G G
500, 600 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M4
N(-) N(-)
700, 800 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size RO,TO = M4 G = M10
Other terminals = M12
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T U V W P1
L1/R L2/S L3/T U V W P1
G G
P(+) P(+)
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T
U V W
P1
L1/R L2/S L3/T U V W
P1
G G
P(+) N(-)
P(+) N(-)
2-16
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(2) Control circuit terminals
30A Y5A CMY Y3 Y1 C1 FMA FMP PLC X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
30C 30B Y5C Y4 Y2 11 12 13 V2 CM CM FWD REV P24 P24 DX- DX+ SD
2.3.5 AF-300 P11 Drive Cable Size, Tightening Torque and Circuit Protection Rating
Incoming Device Tightening Torque lb-Inch (Nm) Cable size AWG
Input Fuse
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
(Nominal)
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
(Maximum) (*1)
Auxiliary
Input
R0, T0
230 VAC Input
0.25 3 3 3 15 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 - 6.2 (0.7) 16 16 - 22
0.5 5 6 3 15 (1.2) - -
1 10 15 3 20 - -
2 15 20 3 30 20.8 (2.36) 20.8 10.6 (1.2) 14
3 20 30 3 40 (2.36) 14 14
5 35 50 3 60 10
7.5 60 80 3 100 31.0 (3.5) 31.0 8
10 70 125 3 125 (3.5) 6
15 100 150 3 175 4
20 125 200 3 225 3
25 150 225 3 250 2
30 175 250 3 300 1
40 200 - 5 200 4/0 1/0 2/0 10
50 225 - 5 225 Qty2 - 1 3/0 4/0 10
60 300 - 5 300 239(27) 119(13.5) 119 Qty2 - 2/0 4/0 Qty2 - 1
75 350 - 5 350 (13.5) Qty2 - 3/0 Qty2 - 1/0 Qty2 - 2/0 8
100 300 - 5 300 Qty 2 - 2/0 Qty2 - 3/0 Qty2 - 4/0 6
125 400 - 5 400 425(48) 239(27) Qty2 - 4/0 Qty2 - 4/0 Qty2 - 250 4
150 450 - 5 450 Qty2 - 250 Qty2 - 300 Qty2 - 350
460 VAC Input
0.5 3 3 3 15 10.6 (1.2) 10.6 - 6.2 (0.7) 16 16 - 22
1 5 6 3 15 (1.2) - -
2 10 10 3 15 20.8 (2.36) 20.8 10.6 (1.2) 14
3 15 15 3 20 (2.36)
5 20 25 3 35 14 14
7.5 30 45 3 50 31.0 (3.5) 31.0 12
10 40 60 3 70 (3.5) 10
15 50 90 3 90
20 70 110 3 110 8
25 80 125 3 150 6
30 100 125 3 175 4
40 100 - 10 100 119(13.5) 2 3 3 10
50 125 - 10 125 1 2 2
60 150 - 10 150 51.3 2/0 2 1
75 175 - 10 175 (5.8) 3/0 1/0 2/0
100 150 - 10 150 2/0 3/0 4/0
125 200 - 10 200 239(27) 119(13.5) 3/0 4/0 Qty2 - 1 10
150 225 - 10 225 239(27) 119 Qty2 - 1/0 Qty2 - 1/0 Qty2 - 1/0 8
200 300 - 10 300 (13.5) Qty2 - 1/0 Qty2 - 2/0 Qty2 - 3/0
250 400 - 10 400 425(48) 239 Qty2 - 3/0 Qty2 - 3/0 Qty2 - 4/0 6
300 450 - 10 450 (27) Qty2 - 4/0 Qty2 - 250 Qty2 - 300 4
350 500 - 10 500 Qty2 - 250 Qty2 - 300 Qty2 - 350
400 600 - 10 600 (*3) Qty2 - 350 Qty2 - 350 Qty2 - 500 (*3)
450 700 - 10 700 Qty2 - 350 Qty2 - 400 Qty2 - 500
500 700 - 10 700 Qty2 - 500 Qty3 - 300 Qty3 - 300
600 1000 - 10 1000 Qty3 - 300 Qty3 - 350 Qty3 - 500
700 1000 - 10 1000 Qty3 - 400 Qty3 - 500 Qty3 - 600
800 1200 - 10 1200 Qty3 - 500 Qty3 - 600 Qty3 - 600
(*1)Class J Fuse or Circuit Breaker reted 600V with the maximum current rating as shown in the above table shall be connected to the drive for 30HP and less.
(*2)Based on GE Fuji standard DB unit and DB resistor designs. Other rating require careful review.
(*3) Consult factory
Device ratings such as system coordination, short-circuit rating and type must be carefully reviewed by the user.
Wire size from NEC tables 310-16. Copper wire rated 60 Deg. C for 100amps or less, 75 Deg. C for over 100 amps in 30 Deg. C ambient and 1.25 times Drive rated amps.
These are minimum wire sizes : consult and conform to local and national codes.
Control U, V, W
DC Reactor
P1, P(+)
DB circuit
(*2) P(+),
N(-), DB
R0,
T0
DB circuit
(*2) P(+),
N(-), DB
R0, T0 Control
L1/R, L2/S,
L3/T
51.3 (5.8)
119(13.5)
51.3 (5.8)
HP
Input Circuit
Breaker (*1)
L1/R, L2/S,
L3/T, U, V,
W, P1, P(+)
E(G)
2-17
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
2.3.6 DC Link Reactor
Dimensions in inches
Terminal
Width Depth
H
e
i
g
h
t
Note:
AF-300 P11 Drives rated 100 Hp and above are furnished with a DC link reactor. This reactor must be installed
between terminal P1 and P+ prior to commissioning of the Drive.
The weight of the DC Link Reactor is not included with that of the Drive.
DC Link Reactor is provided as open type and is separately mounted. Enclosure to be provided by others.
Hp Model No. Width Depth Height Weight Loss [W]
230V P11
100 DCR2-75B 7.87 10.63 7.09 37 55
125 DCR2-90B 7.09 11.02 8.46 37 57
150 DCR2-110B 7.48 12.99 9.05 46 67
460V P11
100 DCR4-75B 7.48 10.63 6.89 35 58
125 DCR4-90B 7.48 11.02 7.87 44 64
150 DCR4-110B 7.48 11.02 7.87 46 73
200 DCR4-132B 7.87 11.02 8.07 55 84
250 DCR4-160B 8.27 12.6 8.07 68 90
300 DCR4-200B 8.27 12.99 9.06 75 126
350 DCR4-220B 8.66 13.78 9.06 81 131
400 DCR4-280B 8.66 14.57 9.65 95 133
450 DCR4-280B 8.66 14.57 9.65 95 150
500 DCR4-355B 9.84 12.99 8.78 99 205
600 DCR4-400B 9.84 13.78 9.17 106 215
700 DCR4-450B 10.63 13.78 10.35 121 272
800 DCR4-500B 11.1 14.17 10.35 143 292
2-18
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Notes
3-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
3.2 Operation Method
There are various methods of operation. Select a method of
operation according to the operating requirements and specifica-
tions; refer to Section 4-2 Operating the Keypad Panel, and
Chapter 5 Function Selection. Table 3-2-1 lists general methods
of operation.
3.3 Trial Run
Once inspection is completed (see Section 3-1), proceed with a
trial run. The motor is initially disconnected and the drive is
operated (factory setting) using the keypad panel.
1. Turn power on and confirm that the LED monitor display 0.00
Hz is blinking.
2. Set the frequency to about 5 Hz using key.
3. To start the run, press FWD key (for forward rotation) or REV
key (for reverse rotation). To stop, press STOP key. Verify
frequency increases for zero to the set point.
Connect motor and repeat steps 1-3
4. Check the following items:
a. Is the direction of rotation correct?
b. Is the rotation smooth (no buzzing or abnormal vibration)?
c. Are acceleration and deceleration smooth?
5. If no abnormality is detected, increase the frequency and
check the above items again. If the results of the trial run are
normal, start a formal run.
3. Operation
3.1 Inspection and Preparation Before Operation
Check the following before operation:
1. Check that the connections are correct.
In particular, check that the power supply is not connected to any of
the U, V, or W output terminals and that the ground terminal is
securely grounded.
2. Check for short circuits and ground faults between the terminals
and sections under power.
3. Check for loose terminals, connectors, or screws.
4. Check that the motor is disconnected from the mechanical
equipment.
5. Turn off switches before turning on power to ensure that the drive
will not start or operate abnormally at power-on.
6. Check the following after power-on:
a. No alarm message is displayed on the keypad panel (see Figure
3-1-2).
b. The fan inside the drive is rotating. (For drives with 2Hp or
more.)
WARNING
Be sure to have the drive cover in place before turning on the power
(closed). Never remove the cover while power is applied to the drive.
To ensure safety, do not operate switches with wet hands. Electric
shock may result.
Operation Frequency Setting Operation
Command Command
Operation Keys on keypad panel
using keypad
panel
Operation Input from
using external Terminals
terminal FWD-CM and
signals REV-CM
Frequency Setting POT(VR),
analog voltage, analog current
FWD REV
STOP
Fig. 3-1-1 Drive connection
Drive
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, U, V, W
power motor
Fig. 3-1-2 Display on keypad panel at power-on
Notes: If an error is detected in the drive or
motors operation, immediately stop and
attempt to determine the cause of error by
referring to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
Since voltage is still present at the main circuit
terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and auxiliary
control power terminals (R0, T0), even when
the output from the drive is terminated, do not
touch the terminals. The smoothing capacitor
in the drive is charged after the power is
turned off and it is not discharged immedi-
ately. Before touching an electric circuit,
confirm that the charge lamp is off or use a
multimeter to check that the volatge has
decreased below 25 VDC for low voltage at
the DC (P-N) terminals.
3-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Notes
4-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
The keypad panel has various functions for specifying operations such as frequency setting, run/stop command, confirm-
ing and changing function data, confirming status, and copying function code settings.
Review the use of each function before attempting to operate the drive from the keypad panel.
The keypad panel can also be removed or inserted during inverter operation. However, if the keypad panel is removed
during keypad panel operation (e.g., run/stop, frequency setting), the drive stops and outputs an alarm.
Control keys
(valid during keypad panel operation):
Used for drive run and stop
FWD Forward operation command
REV Reverse operation
STOP Stop command
Operation keys:
Used for switching screens, data
change,frequency setting, etc.
4.1 Appearance of Keypad Panel
Operation Keys Primary Function
PRG Used to switch the current screen to the menu screen or switch to the initial screen in operation / trip mode.
FUNC
DATA
Used to switch the LED monitor or to determine the entered frequency, function code, or data
Used to change data, move the cursor up or down, or scroll the screen
SHIFT
Used to move the cursor horizontally at data change. When this key is pressed with the up or down key, the cursor moves to
the next function block.
RESET Used to cancel current input data and switch the displayed screen. If an alarm occurs, this key is used to reset the trip status
(valid only when the initial alarm mode screen is displayed)
STOP + Used to switch normal operation mode to jogging operation mode or vice versa. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
STOP + RESET Switches operation mode (from keypad panel operation mode to terminal block operation mode or reverse). When these keys
are operated, function F02 data is switched from 0 to 3 or from 1-4 to 0. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD
indicator.
4. Keypad Panel
LED monitor
4-digit display. Used to display data such as setting frequency, output
frequency and alarm code.
Auxiliary Information Related to LED Monitor
Indicates selected units or multiple of the data shown on the LED monitor
and is displayed on the top line of the LCD monitor. The symbol
indicates selected units or multiple number. The symbol indicates that
there is an upper screen not currently displayed.
LCD Monitor:
Used to display various items of information such as operation status and
function data. An operating guide message, is scrolled and displayed at
the bottom of the LCD monitor. This LCD monitor has a backlight feature
which turns on when the control power is applied or any keypad key is
pressed, and stays on approximately 5 minutes after the last key stroke.
Status Indicators on LCD Monitor:
Displays current operating status:
FWD: Forward operation
REV: Reverse operation
STOP: Stop
Displays the selected operating mode:
REM: terminal block
LOC: keypad panel
COMM: communication terminal
JOG: jogging mode
The symbol indicates that there is a lower screen not currently displayed.
RUN LED (valid during operation from keypad panel):
Indicates that an operation command was input by pressing the FWD or
REV key.
4-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.2 Operation From the Keypad Panel (LCD Screen, Level Structure)
4.2.1 Normal Operation
The keypad panel operating system (screen transition, level structure) is structured as follows:
4.2.2 Alarm Modes
If an alarm is activated, operation is changed from normal keypad panel operation to an alarm mode operation. The alarm
mode screen appears and alarm information is displayed.
The program menu, function screens, and supplementary screens remain unchanged as during normal operation, though
the switching method from program menu to alarm mode is limited to PRG.
Operation Mode
60.00
Program Menu
Alarm
Supplementary
Screen
Alarm Alarm
Alarm mode
Alarm
Screen for each
Function
PRG
DAT
RESET FUNC
DATA
RESET
Alarm is
activated
PRG
FUNC
DATA
RESET
FUNC
DATA
Alarm mode processing (including )
Keypad panel operating system during normal operation
Program Menu
60.00
Supplementary
Screen
60.00
60.00
Operation Mode
60.00
Screen for each
Function
PRG
PRG
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
RESET RESET FUNC
DATA
RESET
4-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Table 4.2.1 Overview of Contents Displayed for each Level
No. Level name Content
1 Operation Mode
2 Program Menu
No. Menu Name Purpose
1 DATA SET
2 DATA CHECK
3 OPR Can check various data on the operating status.
4 I/O CHECK
5 MAINTENANCE
6 LOAD FCTR
7 ALM INF
8 ALM CAUSE
9 DATA COPY Places the function of one inverter in memory for copying to another drive.
3 Screen for each
Function
The function screen selected on the program menu appears, hence completing the function.
4 Supplementary
individual
Can check the latest alarm or simultaneously occurring alarms and alarm
history. Selecting the alarm and pressing displays alarm contents for
troubleshooting.
Functions not completed (e.g., modifying function data, displaying alarm factors) onScreen
function screens are displayed on the supplementary screen.
This screen is for normal operation. Frequency setting from the keypad panel and LED monitor switching are
possible only when this screen is displayed.
Each function of the keypad panel is displayed in menu form and can be selected. By selecting the desired
function from the list and pressing the corresponding function screen is displayed. The following
functions are available as keypad panel functions (menus).
The code and name of the function are displayed. Selecting a function
displays a data setting screen for checking or modifying data.
The code and name of the function are displayed. Select a function to display
a screen for checking data. Modifying data is possible as described above by
going to the data setting screen.
Can check the status of analog and digital input/outputs for the inverter and
options as an I/O checker.
Can check inverter status, life expectancy, communication error status, and
ROM version information as maintenance information.
Can measure maximum and average current and average breaking force in
load rate measurement.
Can check the operating status and input/output status at the latest alarm
occurrence.
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
4-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3 Entering Data on the Keypad Panel
4.3.1 Operation Mode
The screen for normal inverter operation includes a screen for displaying drive operating status and a screen for graphi-
cally displaying the status in the form of a bar graph. The operator can switch between both screens by using the function
(E45).
1) Operating Status (E45=0)
2) Bar Graph (E45=1)
4.3.2 Setting Digital Frequency
On the operation mode screen, press or to display the set frequency on the LED. Data is increased or
decreased in the smallest possible unit, depending on which key is pressed. The adjustments in data will occur rapidly if
the operator holds down or . To select a digit use
SHIFT
and then data can be set directly. To save the
frequency settings press
FUNC
DATA
.
Press RESET and PRG to to return to the operation mode. If keypad panel settings are not selected, the present frequency
setting mode appears on the LCD. When selecting the PID function, the PID command can be set with a process value
(refer to technical documentation for details).
1) Digital (keypad panel) settings (F01=0 or C30=0)
2) Non-digital setting
Direction of rotation = blank (no command) or FWD/REV
Operating status = STOP (no command) or RUN
Output frequency (maximum frequency at full-scale)
Output current (200% of inverter rating at full-scale)
Torque calculation (200% of motor rating at full-scale)
PRG PRG
MENU
F/D LED SHIFT
60.00
STOP
PRG PRG
MENU
F/D LED SHIFT
60.00
Hz
A
%
Fout/Iout/TRQ
60.00
RUN
FWD
Frequency setting value
Screen explanation
Present frequency setting mode
Operations guide
60.00
RUN
PRG PRG
MENU
F/D LED SHIFT
FWD
60.00
F/D DATA SET
<DIG>SET Hz>
LOCAL
50 - 400
F/D DATA SET
<DIG>SET Hz>
LOCAL
50 - 400
STORING...
56.89
Frequency setting value
Screen explanation
Present frequency setting mode
Frequency setting range
Operations guide
When
FUNC
DATA
pressed and writing
60.00
RUN
PRG PRG MENU
F/D LED SHIFT
60.00
F/D DATA SET
<REMOTE REF>
12+V1
4-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.3 Switching to LED Digital Monitor
During normal operation, press
FUNC
DATA
to switch to LED monitor display. When monitored data is switched, the LED
monitor contents are displayed. When power is turned on, the monitor contents set by the function (E43) are displayed
on the LED.
4.3.4 Program Menu Screen
The Program Menu screen is shown below. Only four items can be displayed simultaneously. Move the cursor
with or to select an item, then press
FUNC
DATA
to display the next screen.
4.3.5 Setting Function Data
On the Program Menu screen, select 1. Data Setting. The Function Select screen appears with function codes and
names on it. Select the desired function.
60.00 60.00
60.00 60.00
RUN
PRG PRG MENU
F/D LED SHIFT
1. DATA SETTING
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
F00 DATA PRTC
F01 FREQ COM 1
F02 OPR METHOD
F03 MAX Hz-1
F01 FREQ COM 1
0
0-11
Function Code Function Name
Data Setting Range
Data
1. DATA SETTING
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
9. DATA COPY
DISPLAY
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
When running Unit Remarks
(E44 = 0) (E44 = 1) (E44 = 0.1)
0 Setting frequency Hz
1 Setting frequency
2 Setting frequency
3 Output current A
4 Output voltage V
(specified value)
5 Synchronous r/min.
speed setting
value
6 Line speed m/min.
setting value
7 Load rotation r/min.
speed setting
value
8 Torque calculation % indication
value
9 Power kW
consumption
10 PID setting value
11 PID remote
setting value
12 PID feedback value
E43
PID remote setting value
PID feedback value
For 4 digits or more, the lasr
digits are cut, with x10, x100
marked on the indicator.
Displayed only when PID is
effective in PID operation
selection.
Power consumption
PID setting value
Load rotation speed
Torque calculation value
Line speed
Output current
Output voltage (specified value)
Synchronous speed
When stopping
Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)
Output frquency 2 (after slip compensation)
Setting frequency
PRG
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
4-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
The function code consists of alphanumeric characters with unique letters assigned to each function group.
Table 4-3-1
Function Code Function Remarks
F00 - F42 Fundamental functions
E01 - E47 Terminal Extension Functions
C01 - C33 Frequency Control Functions
P01 - P09 Motor Parameters
H03 - H39 High Performance Functions
A01 - A18 Alternative Motor Parameters
o01 - o29 Optional Functions Can only be selected with an option connected
To scroll the Function Select screen rapidly, use + or + to move the screen as a unit sorted
alphabetically.
Select the desired function and press
FUNC
DATA
to switch to the Data Setting screen.
On the Data Setting screen, the data values on the LCD can be increased or decreased in the smallest possible unit by
pressing or . Holding down or causes the values to increase or decrease more rapidly. Other-
wise, select the digit to be modified using and then set data directly. When data is modified, the value before
modification will be displayed at the same time for reference purpose. To save the data, press
FUNC
DATA
. Pressing cancels
the changes made and returns control to the Function Select screen. The modified data will be effective in inverter
operation after the data has been saved by
FUNC
DATA
. If the data is not saved, there is no change to the inverter operation.
When data setting is disabled in the case of Data protected or Data setting invalid during inverter running, make the
necessary changes as indicated in Table 4-3-2 below.
Table 4.3.2
Display Reason for No Modification Release Method
LINK ACTIVE Currently writing from RS-485 / RTU option to
function is being made
Send a cancel command to function writing from RS-
485 RTU. Stops a write operation from the link
communication option.
NO SIGNAL(WE) The edit enabling command function is selected
using a general-purpose input terminal
For functions E01 to E09, turn data terminal 19 (edit
enabling command selection) ON
DATA PRTCTD Data protection is selected for function F00. Change function F00 to 0
INV RUNNING An attempt was made to change a function that
cannot be changed during inverter operation.
Stop inverter operation
FWD/REV ON An attempt was made to change a function that
cannot be changed with the FWD/REV command
on.
Turn FWD/REV command off
F00 DATA PRTC
F01 FREQ CMD 1
F02 OPR METHOD
F03 MAX Hz-1
F00 DATA PRTC
F01 FREQ CMD 1
F02 PPR METHOD
F03 MAX Hz-1
F42 TRQ VECTOR 1
E01 X1 FUNC
E02 X2 FUNC
E03 X3 FUNC
A18 SLIP COMP 2
F00 DATA PRTC
F01 DATA PRTC
F02 OPR METHOD
+ +
4-7
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.6 Checking Function Data
Select 2. DATA CHECK on the Program Menu screen. The Function Select screen then appears with function codes and
names.
Select the desired function and press FUNC/DATA to check the function data. By pressing FUNC/DATA, the screen
switches to the Data Setting screen, where data can be modified.
4.3.7 Monitoring Operating Status
Select 3. OPR MNTR on the Program Menu screen to display the current inverter operating status. Use and
to switch between the four operation monitor screens.
60.00
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
60.00 60.00
F00 0
F01 *1
F02 *1
F03 60 Hz
60.00
F00 DATA PRTC
0
0 - 1
Function code Data changed from initial value Data
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
1.DATA SETTING
> 2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4.I/O CHECK
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
> 3. OPR MNTR
4.I/O CHECK
60.00 60.00 60.00
Fout=xxxx.xHz
Iout=x.xxA
Vout=xxxV
TRQ=xxx%
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Torque calculation method
60.00 60.00
SYN=xxxxxx
LOD=xxxxxx
LIN=xxxxxx
Synchronous rotation
speed (r/min)
Load speed (r/min)
Line speed (m/min)
Fref=xxxx.x Hz
xxx xx xx xx
Setting frequency
Operation status
FWD/REV: Rotating direction
IL: Current limiting
VL: Voltage limiting
LU: Under voltage
TL: Torque limiting
60.00
SV=xxxxx
PV=xxxxx
TLD=xxx%
TLB=xxx%
PID setting value
PID feedback value
Driving torque limiting setting
Braking torque limiting setting
PRG
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
PRG
FUNC
DATA
4-8
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.8 I/O Check
Select 4. I/O on the Program Menu screen. Check to display analog and digital input/output signal status for the drive and
options. Use and to switch between the seven screens of data.
60.00 60.00
60.00
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
> 4.I/O CHECK
REM X2 X6
FWD X3 X7
REV X4 X8
X1 X5 X9
Signal OFF. Signal ON
Input terminal status (terminals)
60.00
Signal OFF. Signal ON
Signal OFF. Signal ON
Y1 Y5
Y2
Y3
Y4
Output terminal status
60.00
COM X2 X6
FWD X3 X7
REV X4 X8
X1 X5 X9
Input terminal status
(via communication)
60.00
12=xx.xV
22=xx.xV
32=xx.xV
V2=xx.xV
Analog input signal
Terminal 12 input
Terminal 22 input voltage (AIO option)
Terminal 32 input voltage (AIO option)
Terminal V2 input
60.00
C1=xx.xmA
C2=xx.xmA
Terminal C1 input current
Terminal C2 input current (AIO option)
Analog input signal
60.00
AO=xxxxV
CS=xxxmA
DI=xxxxH
DO=xxH
Analog output voltage (AIO option)
Analog output current (AIO option)
Digital input terminal (HEX indication)
Digital ouput terminal (HEX indication)
DIO option I/O status
60.00
FMA=xx.xH
FMP=xx.xV
FMP=xxxxp/s
Output for meter
FMA output voltage
FMP output voltage
FMP output frequency
PRG
FUNC
DATA
60.00
Master-side A/B phase 4x frequency
Master-side Z phase 4x frequency
Slave-side A/B phase 4x frequency
Slave-side Z phase 4x frequency
PG/SY option input status
P1=xxxx0p/s
Z1=xxxp/s
P2=xxxxxOp/s
Z2=xxxp/s
4-9
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Maximum current (rms)
(Maximim value in hour units)
Main capacitor capacity
4.3.9 Maintenance Information
Select 5. on the Program Menu screen. Maintenance to display information necessary for maintenance and inspection.
Use and to switch between the five screens of data.
60.00 60.00
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
> 5. MAINTENANCE
TIME=xxxxxH
EDC=xxxV
TMPI=xxxxC
TMPF=xxxxC
Cumulative powered on time
DC link circuit voltage
Maximum temperature of inside drive
(Maximum value in hour units)
Maximum temperature of heatsink
(Maximum value in hour units)
60.00
60.00
TCAP=XXXXXH
(61000H)
TFAN=XXXXXH
(25000H)
60.00
Imax=xx.xA
CAP=xxx.x%
Capacitor on PC Board
accumulation time
( ): Judgement level
Cooling fan operating
( ): Judgement level time
60.00
NRK=xxxxx
NRR=xxxxx
NRO=xxxxx
No. of communication
errors: keypad panel
No. of communication
errors: RS-485
No. of communication
errors: option
60.00
INV=Hxxxxx
KEYPAD= Kxxxxx
OPTION=Pxxxxx
ROM version (drive)
(40 HP or more: Hxxxxx
30 HP or less Sxxxxx)
ROM version: keypad panel
ROM version: option
PRG
FUNC
DATA
4-10
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.10 Load Rate Measurement
Select 6. Load Rate Measurement (LOAD FCTR) on the Program Menu screen. The maximum current, average current,
and average braking power during the set measuring time are measured and displayed.
60.00
T=3600s
Imax=0.00A
Iave=0.00A
BPave=0.0%
60.00
T=150s
Imax=0.00A
Iave=0.00A
BPave=0.0%
60.00
T=600s
Imax=0.00A
Iave=0.00A
BPave=0.0%
60.00
T=3600s
Imax=56.4A
Iave=23.5A
BPave=10.4%
Display returns to initial value
Maximum current
Average current
Average braking power
(Motor rated output/100%
Displays the remaining
measuring tim, when
reaches zero, ends the
measurement.
(Measures maximum current, average
current and average braking power in
600s intervals.)
Change measuring using and
and
Measuring time
Set measuring time
Start measuring
60.00
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
> 6. LOAD FCTR
60.00
PRG
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
4-11
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.11 Alarm Information
Select 7. Alarm Information (ALM INF) on the Program Menu screen. A variety of operating data at the time the latest
alarm occurred is displayed. Use UP and DOWN to switch between the nine screens of alarm information data.
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
> 7. ALM INF
60.00
OC1
Fout=xxxx.xHz
Iout=x.xxA
Vout=xxxV
TRQ=xxx%
Code of latest alarm
(High speed blinking during alarm
mode only)
Output frequency at alarm
Output current at alarm occurence
Output voltage at alarm occurence
Torque calculation value at alarm
occurence
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
OC1
TIME=xxxxxh
EDC=xxxV
TMPI=xxxxC
TMPF=xxxxC
Cumulative operating hours at alarm occurence
DC link circuit voltage at alarm occurence
Temperature inside drive at alarm occurence
Heat sink temperature at alarm occurence
Fref=xxxx.xHz
xxx xx xx xx
OC1
Setting frequency at alarm occurence
Operating status at alarm occurence
FWD/REV: Rotating
IL: Current limiting
VL: Voltage limiting
LU: Under voltage
TL: Torque limiting
OC1
REM X2 X6
FWD X3 X7
REV X4 X8
X1 X5 X9
SIGNAL OFF, SIGNAL ON
Input terminal status at a alarm
occurence (terminals)
No. of communication errors at
alarm occurence: Keypad panel
No. of communication errors at
alarm occurence: RS 485
No. of communication errors at
alarm occurence: Options
OC1
NRK=xxxxx
NRR=xxxxx
NRO=xxxxx
Input terminal status at a alarm
occurence (communication)
SIGNAL OFF, SIGNAL ON
OC1
COM X2 X6
FWD X3 X7
REV X4 X8
X1 X5 X9
Output terminal status at a alarm
occurence
SIGNAL OFF, SIGNAL ON
OC1
Y1 Y5
Y2
Y3
Y4
OC1
0/1 =xxx xxx
-1 =xxx xxx
-2 =xxx xxx
-3 =xxx xxx
Previous alarm
Before previous alarm
Two times before previous
No. of occurences
Alarm history
No. of occurences
Updated at alarm occurence. If the
cause of an alarm is the same as the
previous one, only the number og
occurences is incremented.
Multiple alarms
(Simultaneously
occuring alarms)
Alarm code
Up to four alarm codes can be dosplayed simultaneously.
OC1
5=xxx
4=xxx
3=xxx
2=xxx
Lastest alarm
PRG
FUNC
DATA
4-12
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.12 Alarm History and Factors
Select 8. Alarm Cause on the Program Menu screen, to display the alarm history.
Press FUNC/DATA to display troubleshooting information for the alarm selected.
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
> 8. ALM CAUSE
60.00
0.1=xxx xxx
-1=xxx xxx
-2=xxx xxx
-3=xxx xxx
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
60.00
Lastest alarm
Alarm history
60.00
5=xxx
4=xxx
3=xxx
2=xxx
0.1=xxx xxx
-1=xxx xxx
-2=xxx xxx
-3=xxx xxx
Multiple alarms
(simultaneously occuring alarms)
Move the cursor using
and to select one of the
alarm occured
Alarm code of the
selected alarm
Alarm occurence factor
of the selected alarm
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
OC1
PRG
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
4-13
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.13 Data Copy
Select 9. Data Copy to display the Data Copy on the Program Menu screen. Read screen. A copy operation is then
performed in the following order: function data is read from the first inverter, the keypad panel is removed and attached to
a second inverter, the data from the first inverter is written to and stored in the second inverter.
The verify feature also makes it possible to compare and check differences in the data stored in the keypad panel and
the data stored in the inverter.
Read data
Write data
Attach keypad panel, Turn power ON.
60.00
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
> 9. DATA COPY
<DATA COPY>
READ
Data copy screen
Mode (read mode)
<DATA COPY>
READ
Reading
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
READ
COMPLETE
Data of drive type read
by keypad panel
Read complete
Remove keypad pananel
60.00
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
> 9. DATA COPY
READ
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
WRITE
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
WRITE
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
WRITE
COMPLETE
Write complete Writing
Mode (write mode)
Drive type of data
stored by keypad panel
PRG
PRG
PRG
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
4-14
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Data check (verify)
60.00
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
> 9. DATA COPY
READ
<DATA COPY>
30HP-2
WRITE
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
VERIFY
COMPLETE
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
VERIFY
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
VERIFY
<DATA COPY>
30HP-2 Drive type of data stored in
the keypad panel
Mode (data check)
Data check in
progress
Data check complete
Error processing
<DATA COPY>
30HP-2
WRITE
INV RUNNING
<DATA COPY>
WRITE
MEMORY ERROR
<DATA COPY>
50HP-2
WRITE
ERR-F25
1. Change disabled during operation
If a write operation is attempted during a drive
operation, or vice versa, the error message below
will appear. After stopping the drive and pressing
RESET retry the write operation.
2. Memory error
If a write operation is attempted while data has not been
saved (i.e. no data) in the keypad panel data memory
during the read mode or when the drive type of data
read by keypad panel is different from the drive type to
which data is to be written, the following error message
will appear.
3. Verify error
During a data check (verify) operation, if data stored
in the keypad panel differs from data stored in the
drive, the following error message is displayed to
indicate the function number. The data is sus-
pended. To continue the data check and check for
other mismatching data, press
FUNC
DATA
. To stop the
data check and switch to another operation, press
RESET .
RUN
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
FWD
PRG
FUNC
DATA
FUNC
DATA
4-15
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
4.3.14 Alarm Mode
If an alarm occurs, the Alarm Screen indicating the alarm contents is displayed. Use and to
display alarm history and multiple alarms (if more than two alarms occur simultaneously).
!!! ! """ "
1.OC1
1=xxx xxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PRG>PRG
MENU
RESET>RESET
Alarm detection on order
Alarm code
No. of consecutive occurences
Alarm name
Operation guide
Operation method
LED
display
LCD
display Description
5. 5 No. 5 alarm
4. 4 No. 4 alarm
3. 3 No. 3 alarm
2. 2 No. 2 alarm
1. 1 No. 1 alarm (more than two alarms occurred)
Blank 0 Latest alarm (only one alarm occurred/alarm released)
Blank -1 Previous alarm history
Blank -2 Alarm history before previous alarm
Blank -3 Alarm history two times before previous alarm
Alarm code: See Table 6-1-1
Alarm detection order
4-16
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Notes:
5-1
5. Function Selection
5.1 Function Selection List
F: Fundamental Functions
Func. Unit Min. Factory Setting Data Change
No. 30 HP 40 HP Formst during op
F00 Data protection F00 DATA PRTC 0, 1 - - 0 1 N
F01 Frequency command 1 F01 FREQ CMD 1 0 to 11 - - 0 1 N
F02 Operation method F02 OPR METHOD 0 to 4 - - 0 1 N
F03 Maximum frequency 1 F03 MAX Hz-1 50 to 120Hz Hz 1 60 1 N
F04 Base frequency 1 F04 BASE Hz-1 25 to 120Hz Hz 1 60 1 N
F05 Rated voltage 1 F05 RATED V-1 0V: (Output voltage V 1 230: (230V class) 1
(at Base frequency 1) proportional to source voltage) 460: (460V class)
230V class: 80 to 240V
460V class: 320 to 480V
F06 Maximum voltage 1 F06 MAX V-1 230V class: 80 to 240V V 1 230: (230V class) 1
(at Maximum frequency 1) 460V class: 320 to 480V 460: (460V class)
F07 Acceleration time 1 F07 ACC TIME1 0.01 to 3600 s s 0.01 6.0 20.0 12
F08 Deceleration time 1 F08 DEC TIME1
F09 Torque boost 1 F09 TRQ BOOST1 0.0, 0.1 to 20.0 - 0.1 2.0 12 Y
F10 Electronic (Select) F10 ELCTRN OL1 0, 1, 2 - - 1 3 Y
F11 Thermal 1 (level) F11 OL LEVEL1 20 to 135% of drive rated current A 0.01 Motor rated current 1 Y
F12 (time constant) F12 TIME CNST1 0.5 to 75.0 min min 0.1 5.0 10.0 19 Y
F13 Electronic thermal overload F13 DBR OL [ Up to 15 HP ] - - 3
relay (for braking resistor) 0, 1, 2 1
[ 20 HP and above ]
0
F14 Restart mode after F14 RESTART 0 to 5 - - 1
momentary power failure
F15 Frequency (high) F15 H LIMITER 0 to 120 Hz Hz 1 70 1 Y
F16 Limiter (low) F16 L LIMITER 0 1 N
F17 Gain (for frequency set signal) F17 FREQ GAIN 0.0 to 200.0% % 0.1 100.0 1 Y
F18 Bias frequency F18 FREQ BIAS -120.0 to +120.0 Hz Hz 0.1 0.0 1 Y
F20 DC brake (starting frequency) F20 DC BRK Hz 0.0 to 60.0 Hz Hz 0.1 0.0 3
F21 (braking level) F21 DC BRK LVL 0 to 80% % 1 0 1
F22 (braking time) F22 DC BRK t 0.0s (inactive) s 0.1 0.0 3
F23 Starting frequency F23 START Hz 0.1 to 60.0 Hz Hz 0.1 0.5 3
F24 (holding time) F24 HOLDING t 0.0 to 10.0 s s 0.1 0.0 3
F25 Stop frequency F25 STOP Hz 0.1 to 6.0 Hz Hz 0.1 0.2 1
F26 Motor sound (carrier freq.) F26 MTR SOUND 0.75 to 15 kHz (6kHz) kHz 1 2 1 Y
F27 (sound tone) F27 SOUND TONE 0 to 3 - - 0 1 Y
F30 FMA (voltage adjust) F30 FMA V-ADJ 0 to 200% % 1 100 1 Y
F31 (function) F31 FMA FUNC 0 to 10 - - 0 1 Y
F33 FMP (pulse rate) F33 FMP PULSES 300 to 6000 p/s (full scale) p/s 1 1440 1 Y
F34 (voltage adjust) F34 FMP V-ADJ 0%, 1 to 200% % 1 0 1 Y
F35 (function) F35 FMP FUNC 0 to 10 - - 0 1 Y
F36 30RY operation mode F36 30RY MODE 0, 1 - - 0 1 Y
F40 Torque limiter1 (driving) F40 DRV TRQ 1 20 to 150%, 999 % 1 999 1
F41 (braking) F41 BRK TRQ 1 0%, 20 to 150%, 999 999 1
5-17 F42 Torque vector control 1 F42 TRQVECTOR1 0, 1 - - 0 1 N
Name LCD Display Setting Range
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
0
0
5-7
5-10
5-11
Pg.
5-12
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-2
E: Terminal Extensions Functions
Pg. Func. Factory Setting Data Change
No. Setting Range Unit Min. 30 HP 40 HP Format During op
E01 X1 terminal function E01 X1 FUNC 0 to 32 0 1 N
E02 X2 terminal function E02 X2 FUNC 1 1 N
E03 X3 terminal function E03 X3 FUNC 2 1 N
E04 X4 terminal function E04 X4 FUNC 3 1 N
E05 X5 terminal function E05 X5 FUNC - - 4 1 N
E06 X6 terminal function E06 X6 FUNC 5 1 N
E07 X7 terminal function E07 X7 FUNC 6 1 N
E08 X8 terminal function E08 X8 FUNC 7 1 N
E09 X9 terminal function E09 X9 FUNC 8 1 N
E10 Acceleration time 2 E10 ACC TIME2 0.01 to 3600 s s 0.01 6.00 20.00 12 Y
E11 Deceleration time 2 E11 DEC TIME2 6.00 20.00 12 Y
E12 Acceleration time 3 E12 ACC TIME3 6.00 20.00 12 Y
E13 Deceleration time 3 E13 DEC TIME3 6.00 20.00 12 Y
E14 Acceleration time 4 E14 ACC TIME4 6.00 20.00 12 Y
E15 Deceleration time 4 E15 DEC TIME4 6.00 20.00 12 Y
E16 Torque limiter 2 (driving) E16 DRV TRQ 2 20 to 150%, 999 % 1 999 1 Y
E17 (braking) E17 BRK TRQ 2 0%, 20 to 150%, 999 % 1 999 1 Y
E20 Y1 terminal function E20 Y1 FUNC 0 to 33 0 1 N
E21 Y2 terminal function E21 Y2 FUNC 1 1 N
E22 Y3 terminal function E22 Y3 FUNC - - 2 1 N
E23 Y4 terminal function E23 Y4 FUNC 7 1 N
E24 Y5A, Y5C terminal function E24 Y5 FUNC 10 1 N
5-24 E25 Y5 RY operation mode E25 Y5RY MODE 0,1 - 1 0 1 N
E30 FAR function (Hysteresis) E30 FAR HYSTR 0.0 to 10.0 Hz Hz 0.1 2.5 3 Y
E31 FDT function (level) E31 FDT1 LEVEL 0 to120 Hz Hz 1 60 1
E32 signal (Hysteresis) E32 FDT1 HYSTR 0.0 to 30.0 Hz Hz 0.1 1.0 3
E33 OL function (mode select) E33 OL1 WARNING 0: Thermal calculation - - 0 1
1: Output current
E34 signal (L (level) E34 OL1 LEVEL 5 to 150% of rated drive current A 0.01 motor rated current 19
E35 (timer) E35 OL1 TIMER 0.1 to 60.0 s s 0.1 10.0 3
E36 FDT2 function (level) E36 FDT2 LEVEL 0 to 120 Hz Hz 1 60 1
E37 OL2 function (level) E37 OL2 LEVEL 5 to 150% of rated drive current A 0.01 motor rated current 19
E40 Display coefficient A E40 COEF A -999.00 to 999.00 - 0.01 0.01 12
E41 Display coefficient B E41 COEF B -999.00 to 999.00 - 0.01 0.00 12 Y
E42 LED Display filter E42 DISPLAY FL 0.0 to 5.0 s s 0.1 0.5 3 Y
E43 LED Monitor (function) E43 LED MNTR 0 to 12 - - 0 1 Y
E44 (display in STOP mode) E44 LED MNTR2 0, 1 - - 0 1 Y
E45 LCD Monitor (function) E45 LCD MNTR 0, 1 - - 0 1 Y
E46 (language) E46 LANGUAGE 0 to 5 - - 1 1 Y
E47 (contrast) E47 CONTRAST 0(soft) to 10(hard) - - 5 1 Y
C:Frequency Control Functions
C01 Jump (Jump freq. 1) C01 JUMP Hz 1 0 to 120 Hz Hz 1 0 1
C02 frequency (Jump freq. 2) C02 JUMP Hz 2 0 1
C03 (Jump freq. 3) C03 JUMP Hz 3 0 1
C04 (Hysteresis) C04 JUMP HYSTR 0 to 30 Hz Hz 1 3 1
C05 Multistep (Freq. 1) C05 MULTI Hz-1 0.00 to 120.00 Hz Hz 0.01 0.00 5
C06 frequency (Freq. 2) C06 MULTI Hz-2 0.00 5
C07 setting (Freq. 3) C07 MULTI Hz-3 0.00 5
C08 (Freq. 4) C08 MULTI Hz-4 0.00 5
C09 (Freq. 5) C09 MULTI Hz-5 0.00 5
C10 (Freq. 6) C10 MULTI Hz-6 0.00 5
C11 (Freq. 7) C11 MULTI Hz-7 0.00 5
C12 (Freq. 8) C12 MULTI Hz-8 0.00 5
C13 (Freq. 9) C13 MULTI Hz-9 0.00 5
C14 (Freq. 10) C14 MULTI Hz-10 0.00 5
C15 (Freq. 11) C15 MULTI Hz-11 0.00 5
C16 (Freq. 12) C16 MULTI Hz-12 0.00 5
C17 (Freq. 13) C17 MULTI Hz-13 0.00 5
C18 (Freq. 14) C18 MULTI Hz-14 0.00 5
C19 (Freq. 15) C19 MULTI Hz-15 0.00 5
Y
Y
Y
Name LCD Display
Y
Y
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-18/21
5-22
5-22/24
5-25
5-3
Func. Factory Setting Data Change
No. Setting Range Unit Min. 30 HP 40 HP Format during op
C20 JOG frequency C20 JOG Hz 0.00 to 120.00 Hz Hz 0.01 5.00 5 Y
C21 PATTERN (mode select) C21 PATTERN 0,1,2 - - 0 1
operation
C22 (Stage 1) C22 STAGE 1 Operation time: 0.00 to 6000 s s 0.01 0.00 F1 13
C23 (Stage 2) C23 STAGE 2 F1 to F4 and R1 to R4 0.00 F1 13
C24 (Stage 3) C24 STAGE 3 0.00 F1 13
C25 (Stage 4) C25 STAGE 4 0.00 F1 13
C26 (Stage 5) C26 STAGE 5 0.00 F1 13
C27 (Stage 6) C27 STAGE 6 0.00 F1 13
C28 (Stage 7) C28 STAGE 7 0.00 F1 13
C30 Frequency command 2 C30 FREQ CMD 2 0 to 11 - - 2 1 N
C31 Offset adjust (terminal [12]) C31 BIAS 12 -100.0 to +100.0% % 0.1 0.0 4 Y
C32 (terminal [C1]) C32 GAIN 12 0.0 to +200.0% % 0.1 100.0 3 Y
5-31 C33 Analog setting signal filter C33 REF FILTER 0.00 to 5.00s s 0.01 0.05 5 Y
P:Motor Parameters
P01 Number of motor 1 poles P01 M1 POLES 2 to 14 - 2 4 9 N
P02 Motor 1 (capacity) P02 M1-CAP Up to 30 HP: 0.01 to 60 HP Hp 0.01 motor capacity 5
40 HP and above: 0.01 to 800 HP
P03 (rated current) P03 M1-Ir 0.00 to 2000 A A 0.01 motor rated current 19 N
P04 (tuning) P04 M1 TUN1 0, 1, 2 - - 0 21 N
P05 (on-line tuning) P05 M1 TUN2 0, 1 - - 0 1 N
P06 (no-load current) P06 M1-Io 0.00 to 2000 A A 0.01 standard rated value 19 N
P07 (%R1 setting) P07 M1-%R1 0.00 to 50.00% % 0.01 standard rated value 5 Y
P08 (%X setting) P08 M1-%X 0.00 to 50.00% % 0.01 standard rated value 5 Y
P09 Slip compensation control P09 SLIP COMP1 0.00 to 15.00 Hz Hz 0.01 0.00 5 Y
H:High Performance Functions
H03 Data initializing H03 DATA INIT 0, 1 - - 0 1 N
H04 Auto-reset (times) H04 AUTO-RESET 0, 1 to 10 times - 1 0 1 Y
H05 (reset interval) H05 RESET INT 2 to 20 s s 1 5 1 Y
H06 Fan stop operation H06 FAN STOP 0, 1 - - 0 1 Y
H07 ACC/DEC pattern (mode select) H07 ACC PTN 0,1,2,3 - - 0 1 N
H08 Rev. phase sequence lock H08 REV LOCK 0, 1 - - 0 1 N
H09 Start mode H09 START MODE 0, 1, 2 - -- 0 1 N
H10 Energy-saving operation H10 ENERGY SAV 0, 1 - - 1 1 Y
H11 DEC mode H11 DEC MODE 0, 1 - - 0 1 Y
H12 Instantaneous OC limiting H12 INST CL 0, 1 - - 1 1 N
H13 Auto-restart (restart time) H13 RESTART t 0.1 to 10.0 s s 0.1 0.1 0.5 3 N
H14 (freq. fall rate) H14 FALL RATE 0.00 to 100.00 Hz/s Hz/s 0.01 10.00 5
H15 (holding DC voltage) H15 HOLD V 3-phase, 230V class: 200 to 300V V 1 200V class: 235V 1
3-phase, 460V class: 400 to 600V 400V class: 470V
H16 (OPR command self hold time) H16 SELFHOLD t 0.0 to 30.0 s, 999 s 0.1 999 3 N
H19 Active drive H19 AUT RED 0, 1 - - 0 1 Y
H20 PID control (mode select) H20 PID MODE 0, 1, 2 -- - 0 1 N
5-38 H21 (feedback signal) H21 FB SIGNAL 0, 1, 2, 3 - - 1 1 N
H22 (P-gain) H22 P-GAIN 0.01 to 10.00 times - 0.01 0.1 5 Y
H23 (I-gain) H23 I-GAIN 0.0, 0.1 to 3600 s s 0.1 0.0 3 Y
H24 (D-gain) H24 D-GAIN 0.00 s , 0.01 to 10.0 s s 0.01 0.00 5 Y
H25 (feedback filter) H25 FB FILTER 0.0 to 60.0 s s 0.1 0.5 3 Y
H26 PTC thermistor (mode select) H26 PTC MODE 0, 1 0 1 Y
H27 (level) H27 PTC LEVEL 0.00 to 5.00V V 0.01 1.60 5 Y
H30 Serial link (function select) H30 LINK FUNC 0, 1, 2, 3 - - 0 1 Y
H31 Modbus-RTU (address) H31 ADDRESS 0 (broadcast), 1 to 247 - 1 1 1 N
H32 (mode select on no response error) H32 MODE ON ER 0, 1, 2, 3 - - 0 1 Y
H33 (timer) H33 TIMER 0.0 to 60.0 s s - 2.0 3 Y
H34 (baud rate) H34 BAUD RATE 0, 1, 2, 3 - - 1 1 Y
H35 (data length) H35 LENGTH 0 (8-bit fixed) - - 0 1 Y
H36 (parity check) H36 PARITY 0, 1, 2 - - 0 1 Y
H37 (stop bits) H37 STOP BITS 0 (2-bit), 1(1-bit) - - 0 1 Y
H38 (no response error detection time) H38 NO RES t 0 (no detection), 1 to 60 s s 1 0 1 Y
H39 (response interval) H39 INTERVAL 0.00 to 1.00 s s 0.01 0.01 5 Y
5-42
5-43
5-39/40
Pg.
5-29
5-29/30
5-30
5-37
5-41
Name LCD Display
N
N
Y
Y
5-36
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-4
A: Alternative Motor Parameters
Pg. Func. Factory Setting Data Change
No. Setting Range Unit Min. 30 HP 40 HP Format During op
A01 Maximum frequency 2 A01 MAX Hz-2 50 to 120 Hz Hz 1 60 1 N
A02 Base frequency 2 A02 BASE Hz-2 25 to 120 Hz Hz 1 60 1 N
A03 Rated voltage 2 A03 RATED V-2 0 V 1 230V class: 230 1
(at Base frequency 2 ) 230V class: 80 to 240V 460V class: 460
460V class: 320 to 480V
A04 Maximum voltage 2 A04 MAX V-2 230V class: 80 to 240V V 1 230V class: 230 1 N
460V class: 320 to 480V 460V class: 460
A05 Torque boost 2 A05 TRQ BOOST2 0.0, 0.1 to 20.0 - - 2.0 3 Y
A06 Electronic (select) A06 ELCTRN OL2 0, 1, 2 - - 1 1 Y
A07 thermal 2 (level) A07 OL LEVEL2 20% to 135% if INV rated current A 0.01 motor rated current 19 Y
A08 (thermal time constant) A08 TIME CNST2 0.5 to 75.0 min min 0.1 5.0 10.0 3 Y
A09 Torque vector control 2 A09 TRQVECTOR2 0, 1 - - 0 1 N
A10 Number of motor 2 poles A10 M2 POLES 2 to 14 poles pole 2 4 9 N
A11 Motor 2 (capacity) A11 M2-CAP Up to 30 HP: 0.01 to 60 HP HP 0.01 motor capacity 5
40 HP and above: 0.01 to 600 HP
A12 (rated current) A12 M2-Ir 0.00 to 2000 A A 0.01 motor rated current 19 N
A13 (tuning) A13 M2 TUN1 0, 1, 2 - - 0 21 N
A14 (on-line tuning) A14 M2 TUN2 0, 1 - - 0 1 N
A15 (no-load current) A15 M2-Io 0.00 to 2000 A A 0.01 standard rated value 19 N
A16 (%R1 setting) A16 M2-%R1 0.00 to 50.00% % 0.01 standard rated value 5 Y
A17 (%X setting) A17 M2-%X 0.00 to 50.00% % 0.01 standard rated value 5 Y
A18 (slip compensation control 2) A18 SLIP COMP2 0.00 to 15.00 Hz Hz 0.01 0.00 5 Y
N
N
5-45
Name LCD Display
5-44
5-5
5.2 Alphabetical Function List
PG. NAME
5-16 30RY operation mode F36 30RY MODE
5-10 Acceleration time 1 F07 ACC TIME1
5-22 Acceleration time 2 E10 ACC TIME2
5-22 Acceleration time 3 E12 ACC TIME3
5-22 Acceleration time 4 E14 ACC TIME4
5-34 ACC/DEC Pattern H07 ACC PTN
5-37 Active Drive H19 AUT RED
5-31 Analog setting signal filter C33 REF FILTER
5-10 Base frequency 1 F04 BASE Hz-1
5-44 Base frequency 2 A02 BASE Hz-2
5-14 Bias frequency F18 FREQ BIAS
5-34 Data initializing H03 DATA INIT
5-7 Data protection F00 DATA PRTC
5-14 DC brake (Braking level) F21 DC BRK LVL
5-14 DC brake (Braking time) F22 DC BRK t
5-14 DC brake (Starting freq.) F20 DC BRK Hz
5-36 DEC mode H11 DEC MODE
5-10 Deceleration time 1 F08 DEC TIME1
5-22 Deceleration time 2 E11 DEC TIME2
5-22 Deceleration time 3 E13 DEC TIME3
5-22 Deceleration time 4 E15 DEC TIME4
5-26 Display coefficient A E40 COEF A
5-26 Display coefficient B E41 COEF B
5-11 Electronic Thermal 1 (Level) F11 OL LEVEL1
5-11 Electronic Thermal 1 (Select) F10 ELCTRN OL1
5-11 Electronic Thermal 1 (Thermal
time constant)
F12 TIME CNST1
5-44 Electronic thermal 2 (Level) A07 OL LEVEL2
5-44 Electronic thermal 2 (Select) A06 ELCTRN OL2
5-44 Electronic thermal 2 (Thermal
time constant)
A08 TIME CNST2
5-11 Electronic thermal overload
relay (for DB resistor)
F13 DBR OL
5-36 Energy-saving operation H10 ENERGY SAV
5-34 Fan stop operation H06 FAN STOP
5-25 FAR function (Hysteresis) E30 FAR HYSTR
5-25 FDT function (Level) E31 FDT1 LEVEL
5-25 FDT signal (Hysteresis) E32 FDT1 HYSTR
5-25 FDT2 function (Level) E36 FDT2 LEVEL
5-15 FMA (Voltage adjust) F30 FMA V-ADJ
5-15 FMA (Function) F31 FMA FUNC
5-16 FMP (Function) F35 FMP FUNC
5-16 FMP (Pulse rate) F33 FMP PULSES
5-16 FMP (Voltage adjust) F34 FMP V-ADJ
5-7 Frequency command 1 F01 FREQ CMD 1
5-30 Frequency command 2 C30 FREQ CMD 2
5-14 Frequency limiter (High) F15 H LIMITER
5-14 Frequency limiter (Low) F16 L LIMITER
5-14 Gain (for freq set signal) F17 FREQ GAIN
5-36 Instantaneous OC limiting H12 INST CL
5-29 JOG frequency C20 JOG Hz
5-28 Jump frequency (Hysteresis) C04 JUMP HYSTR
5-28 Jump frequency (Jump freq 1) C01 JUMP Hz 1
5-28 Jump frequency (Jump freq 2) C02 JUMP Hz 2
5-28 Jump frequency (Jump freq 3) C03 JUMP Hz 3
5-27 LCD Monitor (Contrast) E47 CONTRAST
5-27 LCD Monitor (Function) E45 LCD MNTR
5-27 LCD Monitor (Language) E46 LANGUAGE
5-26 LED Display filter E42 DISPLAY FL
5-26 LED Monitor (Function) E43 LED MNTR
LCD Display PG. NAME
5-26 LED Monitor (Display @ STOP
mode)
E44 LED MNTR2
5-10 Maximum frequency 1 F03 MAX Hz-1
5-44 Maximum frequency 2 A01 MAX Hz-2
5-10 Maximum voltage 1 F06 MAX V-1
5-44 Maximum voltage 2 A04 MAX V-2
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Address) H31 ADDRESS
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Baud rate) H34 BAUD RATE
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Data length) H35 LENGTH
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Mode select on
no response error)
H32 MODE ON ER
5-43 Modbus-RTU (No response
error detection time)
H38 NO RES t
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Parity check) H36 PARITY
5-43 Modbus-RTU (Response
interval)
H39 INTERVAL
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Stop bits) H37 STOP BITS
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Timer) H33 TIMER
5-33 Motor 1 (%R1 setting) P07 M1-%R1
5-33 Motor 1 (%X setting) P08 M1-%X
5-32 Motor 1 (Capacity) P02 M1 -CAP
5-33 Motor 1 (No-load current) P06 M1-lo
5-33 Motor 1 (On-line Tuning) P05 M1 TUN2
5-32 Motor 1 (Rated current) P03 M1-lr
5-32 Motor 1 (Tuning) P04 M1 TUN1
5-45 Motor 2 (%R1 setting) A16 M2-%R1
5-45 Motor 2 (%X setting) A17 M2-%X
5-44 Motor 2 (Capacity) A11 M2-CAP
5-45 Motor 2 (No-load current) A15 M2-Io
5-45 Motor 2 (On-line Tuning) A14 M2 TUN2
5-44 Motor 2 (Rated current) A12 M2-Ir
5-45 Motor 2 (Slip compensation
control 2)
A18 SLIP COMP2
5-45 Motor 2 (Tuning) A13 M2 TUN1
5-15 Motor sound (Carrier freq.) F26 MTR SOUND
5-15 Motor sound (Sound tone) F27 SOUND TONE
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 1)
C05 MULTI Hz-1
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 2)
C06 MULTI Hz-2
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 3)
C07 MULTI Hz-3
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 4)
C08 MULTI Hz-4
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 5)
C09 MULTI Hz-5
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 6)
C10 MULTI Hz-6
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 7)
C11 MULTI Hz-7
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 8)
C12 MULTI Hz-8
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 9)
C13 MULTI Hz-9
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq.10)
C14 MULTI Hz-10
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq.11)
C15 MULTI Hz-11
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq.12)
C16 MULTI Hz-12
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq.13)
C17 MULTI Hz-13
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq.14)
C18 MULTI Hz-14
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq.15)
C19 MULTI Hz-15
LCD Display
5-6
5.2 Alphabetical Function List (continued)
PG. NAME
5-32 Number of motor 1 poles P01 M1 POLES
5-44 Number of motor 2 poles A10 M2 POLES
5-30 Offset adjust (terminal [12]) C31 BIAS 12
5-30 Offset adjust (terminal [C1]) C32 GAIN 12
5-25 OL function (Mode select) E33 OL1 WARNING
5-25 OL function siganl (Timer) E35 OL1 TIMER
5-25 OL function signal (Level) E34 OL1 LEVEL
5-25 OL2 function (Level) E37 OL2 LEVEL
5-7 Operation method F02 OPR METHOD
5-29 Pattern (Stage 1) C22 STAGE 1
5-29 Pattern (Stage 2) C23 STAGE 2
5-29 Pattern (Stage 3) C24 STAGE 3
5-29 Pattern (Stage 4) C25 STAGE 4
5-29 Pattern (Stage 5) C26 STAGE 5
5-29 Pattern (Stage 6) C27 STAGE 6
5-29 Pattern (Stage 7) C28 STAGE 7
5-29 PATTERN operation (Mode
select)
C21 PATTERN
5-39 PID control (D-gain) H24 D-GAIN
5-41 PID control (Feedback filter) H25 FB FILTER
5-38 PID control (Feedback signal) H21 FB SIGNAL
5-39 PID control (I-gain) H23 I-GAIN
5-37 PID control (Mode select) H20 PID MODE
5-39 PID control (P-gain) H22 P-GAIN
5-41 PTC thermistor (Level) H27 PTC LEVEL
5-41 PTC thermistor (Mode select) H26 PTC MODE
5-10 Rated voltage 1 F05 RATED V-1
5-44 Rated voltage 2 (at Base
frequency 2)
A03 RATED V-2
5-12 Restart mode after momentary
power failure
F14 RESTART
5-35 Rev. phase sequence lock H08 REV LOCK
5-42 Serial link (Function select) H30 LINK FUNC
5-33 Slip compensation control P09 SLIP COMP1
5-35 Start mode H09 START MODE
5-15 Starting frequency (Freq.) F23 START Hz
5-15 Starting frequency (Holding
time)
F24 HOLDING t
5-15 Stop frequency F25 STOP Hz
5-11 Torque boost 1 F09 TRQ BOOST1
5-44 Torque boost 2 A05 TRQ BOOST2
5-16 Torque limiter 1 (braking) F41 BRK TRQ 1
5-16 Torque limiter 1 (Driving) F40 DRV TRQ 1
5-22 Torque limiter 2 (braking) E17 BRK TRQ 2
5-22 Torque limiter 2 (Driving) E16 DRV TRQ 2
5-177 Torque vector control 1 F42 TRQVECTOR1
5-44 Torque vector control 2 A09 TRQVECTOR2
5-18 X1 terminal function E01 X1 FUNC
5-18 X2 terminal function E02 X2 FUNC
5-18 X3 terminal function E03 X3 FUNC
5-18 X4 terminal function E04 X4 FUNC
5-18 X5 terminal function E05 X5 FUNC
5-18 X6 terminal function E06 X6 FUNC
5-18 X7 terminal function E07 X7 FUNC
5-22 Y1 terminal function E20 Y1 FUNC
5-22 Y2 terminal function E21 Y2 FUNC
5-22 Y3 terminal function E22 Y3 FUNC
5-22 Y4 terminal function E23 Y4 FUNC
5-24 Y5 RY operation mode E25 Y5RY MODE
5-22 Y5A, Y5C terminal func. E24 Y5 FUNC
LCD Display
5-7
F00 Data protection
F 0 0 D A T A P R T C
Setting range 0 : data can be changed
1 : data cannot be changed
This function protects the system by blocking any data
changes from the keypad panel.
Setting procedure:
0 to 1: Press the
STOP
and keys simultaneously to
change the value from 0 to 1, then press
the
FUNC
DATA to validate the change.
1 to 0: Press the
STOP
and keys simultaneously
to change the value from 1 to 0, then press
the
FUNC
DATA
key to validate the change.
F01 Frequency setting 1
F 0 1 F R E Q C M D 1
This function determines the method to be used for setting
frequency.
NOTE: Use only one terminal - V2 or C1, exclusively.
0: Keypad operation ( or key)
1: Voltage input (terminal 12 and V2) (0 to +10 VDC,
0 to +5VDC)
2: Current input (terminal C1) (4 to 20 mA DC)
3: Voltage and current input (terminals 12 and C1)
4: Reversible operation with polarity (terminal 12)
(0 to 10 VDC)
5: Reversible operation with polarity (terminal 12 and V1
option) (0 to 10 VDC)
Related functions E01 to E09 (Set values 21)
6: Inverse mode operation (terminal 12 and V2)
(+10 to 0 VDC)
7: Inverse mode operation ( terminal C1)(20 to 4 mA DC)
8: UP/DOWN control 1 (initial freq. = 0 Hz
9: UP/DOWN control 2 (initial freq. = last value)
Related functions E01 to E09 (Set values 17, 18)
10. PATTERN operation
Related functions: C21 to C28
11: DI option or Pulse train input
For details, see instruction manual on options.
F02 Operation method
F 0 2 O P R M E T H O D
This function determines the input method for operation
commands.
0: Keypad operation ( FWD or REV or STOP key)
1: Terminal operation ( STOP key active)
2: Terminal operation ( STOP key inactive)
3: Terminal operation ( STOP key active) with GE start
software
4: Terminal operation ( STOP key inactive) with GE start
software
Note: GE start software prevents drive from restarting
when power is applied.
This function can only be changed when terminals FWD
and REV are open.
REMOTE/LOCAL switching from the keypad panel
automatically changes the set value from 0 to 3 of this
function.
5.3 Function Explanation
F: Fundamental Functions
5-8
GE Start Software Selection During Terminal Operation
Stop Key Mode Selection During Terminal Operation
* See Alarm Mode, page 4-15.
Note: Start Software does not work at AUTO RESET mode and PROGRAMMING mode
POWER ON
RESET
NETWORK
MODE
Inactive: Setting 1 or 2 Active: Setting 3 or 4
POWER
FWD
OUTPUT
ALARM
POWER
FWD
OUTPUT
ALARM
RESET
FWD
OUTPUT
ALARM
RESET
FWD
OUTPUT
ALARM
NETWORK
FWD
FWD
OUTPUT
ALARM
ER6
Multi Alarms*
(LE-CM)
(TERMINAL)
(NETWORK)
ER6
ER6
RESET
NETWORK
FWD
FWD
OUTPUT
ALARM
(LE-CM)
(TERMINAL)
(NETWORK)
NETWORK
FWD
STOP
OUTPUT
ALARM
(LE-CM)
(TERMINAL)
NETWORK
FWD
STOP
OUTPUT
ALARM
(LE-CM)
(TERMINAL)
FWD
STOP
OUTPUT
ALARM
FWD
STOP
OUTPUT
ALARM
Inactive: Setting 2 or 4 Active: Setting 1 or 3
STOP KEY
STOP KEY
TERMINAL
MODE
NETWORK
MODE
ER6
ER6
5-9
Frequency Setting Block Diagram
5-10
F03 Maximum output frequency 1
F 0 3 M A X H z 1
Setting range 50 to 120 Hz
This function sets the maximum output frequency for
Motor 1.
Setting a value higher than the rated value of the device
to be driven may damage the motor or machine. Match
the device rating when setting this function.
F04 Base frequency 1
F 0 4 B A S E H z 1
Setting range 25 to 120Hz
This function sets the maximum output frequency in the
constant torque range of Motor 1 or the output frequency
at the rated output voltage. Match the motor rating.
Note: If the value of Base frequency 1 is set higher than
that of Maximum output frequency 1, the output voltage
does not increase to the rated voltage. The maximum
frequency limits the output frequency.
F05 Rated voltage 1
F 0 5 R A T E D V 1
Setting range 230V AC series: 0, 80 to 240V
460 V series: 0, 320 to 480V
This function sets the rated value of the voltage output to
Motor 1. Note that a voltage greater than the supply
(input) voltage cannot be output.
Value 0 terminates operation of the voltage regulator
function, thereby resulting in the output of a voltage
proportional to the supply voltage.
Note: If the value of Rated voltage 1 is set higher than
Maximum output voltage 1, the output voltage does not
increase to the rated voltage. The maximum output
voltage limits the output voltage.
FO6 Maximum output voltage 1
F 0 6 M A X V 1
Setting range 230 V AC series: 80 to 240 VAC
460 VAC series: 320 to 480 VAC
This function sets the maximum value of the voltage
output for Motor 1. Note that a voltage higher than the
supply (input) voltage cannot be output.
FO7 Acceleration time 1
F08 Deceleration time 1
Setting range ACC TIME1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds
DEC TIME1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds
These functions set the acceleration time for the output
frequency from startup to maximum frequency, as well as
the deceleration time from maximum frequency to
operation stop.
Acceleration and deceleration times are represented by
the three most significant (high-order) digits.
Set acceleration and deceleration times with respect to
maximum frequency. The relationship between the set
frequency value and acceleration/deceleration times is
as follows:
Set frequency = maximum frequency
The actual operation time matches the set value.
Set frequency < maximum frequency
The actual operation time differs from the set value.
Acceleration *deceleration operation time = set value x
(set frequency/maximum frequency)
Note: If the set acceleration and deceleration times are
set too low, even though the resistance torque and
moment of inertia of the load are great, if the torque
limiting functions or stall prevention function are acti-
vated, it prolongs the operation time beyond the set
value.
FWD
STOP
F 0 7 A C C T I M E 1
F 0 8 D E C T I M E 1
5-11
F09 Torque Boost 1
F 0 9 T R Q B O O S T 1
This is a Motor 1 function. The following can be se-
lected:
Selection of load characteristics such as automatic
torque boost, square law reduction torque load, propor-
tional torque load, constant torque load.
Enhancement of torque (V/f characteristics), which is
lowered during low-speed operation. Insufficient mag-
netic flux of the motor due to a voltage drop in the low-
frequency range can be compensated.
Setting Range Characteristics Selected
0.0 Automatic torque boost, where the torque
boost value of a constant torque load (a
linear change) is automatically adjusted.
0.1 to 0.9 Square law reduction torque for fan and
pump loads
1.0 to 1.9 Proportional torque for middle class loads
between square law reduction torque and
constant torque (linear change)
2.0 to 20.0 Constant torque (linear change)
Since a large torque boost value creates over-excitation
in the low-speed range, continued operation may cause
the motor to overheat. Check the characteristics of the
driven motor.
F10 Electric thermal O/L relay (operation selection)
F11 Electric thermal O/L relay (level)
F12 Electric thermal O/L relay (thermal time)
The electronic thermal O/L relay manages the output
frequency, output current, and operation time of the
inverter to prevent the motor from overheating when
150% of the set current value flows for the time set by
F12 (thermal time constant).
F 1 0 E L C T R N O L 1
Setting range 0: Inactive
1: Active (for general-purpose motor)
2: Active (for forced air motor)
This function specifies whether to operate the electronic
thermal O/L relay and selects the target motor. When a
general-purpose motor is selected, the operation level is
lowered in the low speed range according to the cooling
characteristics of the motor.
F 1 1 O L L E V E L 1
The setting range is 20 to 135% of the rated drive current.
This function sets the operation level current for the
electronic thermal O/L relay. Enter a value from 1 to 1.1
times the rated motor current value.
F 1 2 T I M E C N S T 1
The setting range is 0.5 to 75.0 minutes (in 0.1 minute
increments).
The time from when 150% of the operation level current
flows continuously to when the electronic thermal O/L
relay activates can be set with this function.
F13 Electric thermal O/L relay (for braking)
F 1 3 D B R O L
This function controls the frequent use and continuous
operating time of the braking resistor to prevent the
resistor from overheating.
Drive Capacity Operation
15 Hp or less 0: Inactive
1: Inactive
2: Active (external braking resistor)
20 Hp or more 0: Inactive
Torque characteristics
< Square law reduction torque > < Proportional torque >
< Constant torque >
5-12
F 1 4 R E S T A R T
Setting range: 0 to 5
The following table lists the function details.
This function selects operation if a momentary power
failure occurs.
F14 Restart after momentary power failure (operation selection)
Note: Function codes H13 to H16 are provided to control
a restart operation after momentary power failure. These
functions should be understood and used. The pick-up
(speed search) function can also be selected as a method
of restarting when power is recovered after a momentary
failure. (For setting details, see function code H09.) The
pick-up function searches for the speed of the coasting
motor to restart the motor without subjecting it to exces-
sive shock.
Set Value Function Name Operation at Power Failure Operation at Power Recovery
0 Inactive (intermediate
drive trip)
If undervoltage is detected, the drive will
immediately trip and an undervoltage fault (LU) is
displayed. The drive output stops and the motor will
coast to a stop.
The drive operation is not automatically
restarted. Input a reset command and
operation command to restart.
1 Inactive (drive trip at
recovery)
If undervoltage is detected, the drive output stops
and the motor will immediately coast to a stop. A
drive fault is not activated.
An undervoltage fault (LU) is activated at
power recovery. Drive operation is not
automatically restarted. Input a reset
command to restart operation.
2 Inactive (drive trip
after deceleration to a
stop at power failure)
When the DC bus voltage reaches the operation
voltage level (H15), a controlled deceleration to a
stop occurs. The drive collects the inertial energy
of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage and
controls the motor until it stops, then an
undervoltage fault (LU) is activated. The drive will
automatically decrease the deceleration time if
necessary. If the amount of inertial energy from the
load is small, and the undervoltage level is
achieved before the motor stops, the undervoltage
fault is immediately activated and the motor will
coast to a stop.
The drive operation is not automatically
restarted. Input a reset command and
operation command to restart operation.
3 Active (operation ride-
through; for high-inertia
loads)
When the DC bus voltage reaches the operation
voltage level (H15), energy is collected from the
inertia of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage
and extend the ride-through time. The drive will
automatically adjust the deceleration rate to
maintain DC bus voltage level. If undervoltage is
detected, the protective function is not activated,
but drive output stops and the motor coast to a
stop.
Operation is automatically restarted. For
power recovery during ride-through, the
drive will accelerate directly to the
original frequency. If undervoltage is
detected, operation automatically
restarts with the frequency selected at
the time that the undervoltage was
detected.
4 Active (restart with the
frequency at the time
of power failure)
If undervoltage is detected, the protective function
is not activated. The drive output stops and the
motor will coast to a stop.
Operation is automatically restarted with
the frequency selected at the time of
power failure.
5 Active (restart with
start frequency; for low-
inertia loads)
If undervoltage is detected, the protective function
is not activated, but drive output stops.
Operation is automatically restarted with
the frequency set by F23, Starting
frequency.
In a high-inertia system, the reduction in motor speed is
minimal even when the motor is coasting. A speed search
time is required when the pick-up function is active. In
such a case, the original frequency may be recovered
sooner when the function is inactive and the operation is
restarted with the frequency prior to the momentary power
failure.
The pick-up function works in the range of 5 to 120 Hz. If
the detected speed is outside this range, restart the motor
using the regular restart function.
The function for detecting power failure and activating
protective operation (i.e., alarm output, alarm display, drive
output cutoff) for undervoltage can be selected. The
automatic restart function (for automatically restarting a
coasting motor without stopping) when the supply voltage
is recovered can also be selected.
5-13
5-14
F15 Frequency limiter (High)
F16 Frequency limiter (Low)
F 1 5 H L I M I T E R
F 1 6 L L I M I T E R
Setting range 0 to 120 Hz
These functions are used to define the upper and lower
limits of the set frequency.
The drive output starts with the start frequency when
operation begins, and stops with the stop frequency
when operation ends.
If the upper limit value is less than the lower limit value,
the upper limit value overrides the lower limit value.
F17 Gain
F 1 7 F R E Q G A I N
Setting range: 0.0 to 200.0%
This function assigns the rate of the set frequency value
to analog input.
Operation follows the figure below.
F18 Bias frequency
F 1 8 F R E Q B I A S
Setting range: -120.0 to 120.0 Hz
This function adds a bias frequency to the set frequency
value from analog input.
The operation follows the figure below. If the bias
frequency is higher than the +Maximum frequency or
lower than the -Maximum frequency, it is limited to the
+Maximum or -Maximum frequency.
F20 DC injection Brake (starting)
F21 DC injection brake (operation level)
F22 DC injection brake (time)
F 2 0 D C B R K H z
Setting range: 0 to 60 Hz
Starting frequency: This function sets the frequency with
which to start a DC injection brake in order to decelerate
the motor to a stop.
F 2 1 D C B R K L V L
Setting range: 0 to 80%
Operation level: This function sets the output current
level, when a DC injection brake is applied, as a percent-
age of the rated output current in 1% increments.
F 2 2 D C B R K t
Setting range: 0.0: Inactive
0.1 to 30.0 seconds
Time: This function sets the time for a DC injection
brake operation.
CAUTION
Do not use the drive brake function for
mechanical holding. Injury may result.
5-15
F23 Starting frequency (frequency)
F24 Start frequency (Holding time)
F25 Stop frequency
F 2 3 S T A R T H z
Setting range: 0.1 to 60 Hz
Frequency: This function sets the frequency at startup.
The starting frequency can be set to reserve the torque
at startup and can be sustained until the magnetic flux of
the motor is established.
F 2 4 H O L D I N G t
Setting range: 0.1 to 10.0 seconds
Holding time: This function sets the holding time during
which the start frequency is sustained at startup.
- The holding time does not apply during switching
between forward and reverse.
- The holding time is not included in the acceleration
time.
- The holding time also applies when pattern opera-
tion (C21) is selected. The holding time is included
in the timer value.
F 2 5 S T O P H z
Setting range: 0.1 to 6.0 Hz
This function sets the frequency at stop.
The operation will not start if the starting frequency is
less than the stopping frequency or if the set frequency
is less than the stopping frequency.
F26 Motor sound (carrier frequency)
F 2 6 M T R S O U N D
This function adjusts the carrier frequency to prevent
resonance with the machine system, reduce motor and
drive noise, and also reduce leakage current from output
circuit wiring.
Drive Capacity Setting Range
30 Hp or less 0.75 to 15kHz
40 to 100 Hp 0.75 to 10kHz
100 Hp or more 0.75 to 6kHz
Carrier frequency Low High
Motor noise High Low
Output current waveform Bad Good
Leakage current Small amount Large amount
Noise occurrence (RFI) Extremely low High
1. Reducing the set value adversely affects the output
current waveform (i.e., higher harmonics), increases
motor loss, and raises motor temperature. For
example, at 0.75 kHz, reduce the motor torque by
about 15%.
2 Increasing the set value increases drive losses and
raises drive temperature.
F27 Motor sound (sound tone)
F 2 7 M T R T O N E
Setting range: 0 , 1, 2 , 3
The tone of motor noise can be altered if the carrier
frequency is 7 kHz or lower. Use this function as required.
F30 FMA terminal (voltage adjustment)
F31 FMA terminal (function selection)
F 3 0 F M A V A D J
Setting range: 0 to 200%
Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can be
output to terminal FMA as a DC voltage. The amplitude of
the output can also be adjusted.
This function adjusts the voltage value of the monitor item
selected in F31 when the monitor amount is 100%. A
value from 0 to 200% can be set in 1% increments.
F 3 1 F M A F U N C
This function selects the monitor item to be output to
Terminal FMA.
Value Monitor Item 100% Monitor Amount
0 Output frequency 1 Maximum output
(before slip frequency
compensation)
1 Output frequency 2 Maximum output
(after slip frequency
compensation)
2 Output current 2x rated output current of drive
3 Output voltage 230V series: 250V
460V series: 500V
4 Output torque 2x rated motor torque
5 Load rate 2x rated load of motor
6 Output 2x rated drive output
7 PID feedback amount Feedback amount at 100%
9 DC link circuit voltage 230V series: 500V
460V series: 1,000V
10 Universal AO Output from RS485 or Bus option
5-16
F33 FMP terminal (pulse rate)
F34 FMP terminal (voltage adjustment)
F35 FMP terminal (function selection)
Monitor data (e.g., output frequency, output current) can
be output to terminal FMP as pulse voltage. Monitor
data can also be sent to an analog meter as average
voltage.
When sending data to a digital counter or other instru-
ment as pulse output, set the pulse rate in F33 to any
value and the voltage in F34 to 0%.
When data is sent to an analog meter or other instru-
ment as average voltage, the voltage value set in F34
determines the average voltage, and F33 is fixed at 2670
(p/s).
F 3 3 F M P P L U S E S
Setting range 300 to 6,000 p/s, in 1 p/s increments
The F33 function sets the pulse frequency of the monitor
item selected in F35.
Pulse frequency (p/s) = 1/T
Duty (%) = T1/T x 100
Average voltage (V) = 15.6 x T1/T
F 3 4 F M P V A D J
Set value 0%: The pulse frequency varies depending on
the amount of the monitor item selected in F35 (max.
value is the value set in F33).
The F34 function sets the average voltage of pulse
output to terminal FMP.
1 to 200%: Pulse frequency is fixed at 2,670 p/s. The
average voltage of the monitor item selected in F35,
when the monitor amount is 100%, is adjusted in the
range 1 - 200%, in 1% increments (pulse duty varies).
F 3 5 F M P F U N C
The F35 function selects the monitor item to be output to
terminal FMP.
The set value and monitor items are the same as those
used for F31 (refer to table).
F36 30Ry operation mode
F 3 6 3 0 R Y M O D E
This function specifies whether to activate (excite) the
alarm output relay (30Ry) for any fault at normal or alarm
status.
Value
0 Drive no power 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
At normal 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
At alarm 30A - 30C: ON, 30B - 30C:OFF
1 Drive no power 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
At normal 30A - 30C: ON, 30B - 30C: OFF
At alarm 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
Operation
If the set value is 1, contacts 30A and 30C are connected
when the drive control voltage is established (about one
second after power on).
F40 Torque limit 1 (drive)
F41 Torque limit 1 (brake)
F 4 0 D R V T R Q I
F 4 1 B R K T R Q I
The torque limit operation calculates motor torque from
the output voltage, current and the primary resistance
value of the motor, and controls the frequency so the
calculated value does not exceed the limit. This opera-
tion enables the drive to continue operation under the
limit even if a sudden change in load torque occurs.
Limits are set for driving torque and braking torque.
When this function is activated, acceleration and
deceleration operation times are longer than the set
values.
Function Set Value Operation
Torque 20% to 150% The torque is limited
limit to the set value.
(driving)
999 Torque limiting inactive
Torque 20% to 150% The torque is limited to
limit the set value.
(braking)
0 Automatically prevents
OU2 trip due to power
regeneration effect
999 Torque limiting inactive
WARNING
When the torque limit function is selected, an
operation may not match the set acceleration and
deceleration time or set speed. The machine should
be so designed that safety is ensured even when
operation does not match the set values.
5-17
F42 Torque vector control 1
F 4 2 T R Q V E C T O R 1
To obtain the most efficient motor torque, the torque
vector control calculates torque according to load, to
adjust the voltage and current vectors to optimum values
based on the calculated value.
Value Operation
0 inactive
1 active
Related Functions P01 to P09
If F42 = 1 (active), the following functions are affected:
1. F09 Torque boost 1 is automatically set to 0.0
(automatic torque boosting).
2. P09 Slip compensation control is automatically
activated. If set to 0.0, the amount of slip compensa-
tion for a standard 3-phase Fuji motor is applied.
Otherwise, the set value is applied.
Use the torque vector control function under the following
conditions:
1. There can only be one motor.
Connection of two or more motors makes accurate
control difficult.
2. The function data (rated current P03, no-load current
P06,, %R1 P07, and %X P08) for Motor 1 must be
correct.
If a standard 3-phase GE motor is used, setting the
capacity (Function P02) ensures entry of the above
data. An auto-tuning operation should be performed
for other motors.
3. The rated current of the motor must not be signifi-
cantly less than the rated current of the drive. A
motor two sizes lower in capacity than the nominal
motor indicated for the drive is the smallest that
should be used.
4. To prevent leakage current and ensure accurate
control,, the length of the cable between the drive and
motor should not exceed 50 m.
5. If a reactor is connected between the drive and the
motor and wiring impedance cannot be disregarded,
use P04 Auto tuning to reset data.
If these conditions are not satisfied, set F42 = 0 (Inactive).
5-18
E: Extension Terminal Functions
E01 Terminal X1
E09 Terminal X9
E 0 1 X 1 F U N C
E 0 2 X 2 F U N C
E 0 3 X 3 F U N C
E 0 4 X 4 F U N C
E 0 5 X 5 F U N C
E 0 6 X 6 F U N C
E 0 7 X 7 F U N C
E 0 8 X 8 F U N C
E 0 9 X 9 F U N C
Functions can be individually set from each of the digital
input terminals X1 to X9.
Value Function
0,1,2,3
Multi-step frequency selection (1 to 15 steps)
4,5
Acceleration and deceleration time selection (3 steps)
6
Self-hold selection (HLD)
7
Coast-to-stop command (BX)
8
Alarm reset (RST)
9
External alarm (THR)
10
Jogging (JOG)
11
Frequency setting 2 / Frequency setting 1 (Hz 2 / Hz1)
12
Motor 2 / Motor 1 (M2 / M1)
13
DC injection brake command (DCBRK)
14
Torque limit 2 / Torque limit 1 (TL2 / TL1)
15
Switching operation from line to drive (50 Hz) (SW50)
16
Switching operation from line to drive (60 Hz) (SW60)
17
UP command (UP)
18
DOWN command (DOWN)
19
Edit permission command (WE-KP)
20
PID control cancellation (Hz / PID)
21
Normal/Inverse switching (Terminals 12 and C1) (IVS)
22
Interlock (52-2) (IL)
23
Torque control cancellation (Hz/TRQ)
24
Link communication selection (LE)
25
Universal DI (U-DI)
26
Pick up start mode (STM)
30
Timed alarm stop command (STOP1)
31
Timed alarm stop command with
Deceleration time 4 (STOP2)
Note: Values which are not set in the functions from E01
to E09 are assumed to be inactive.
Multi-step frequency selection
Value 0,1, 2, 3: The frequency can be switched to a
preset frequency in function codes C05 to C19 by
switching the external digital input signal. Assign values
0 to 3 to the target digital input terminal. The combina-
tion of input signals determines the frequency.
3 2 1 0
(SS8) (SS4) (SS2) (SS1)
off off off on C05 MULTI Hz-1
off off on off C06 MULTI Hz-2 Related
off off on on C07 MULTI Hz-3 Functions:
off on off off C08 MULTI Hz-4 C05-C19
off on off on C09 MULTI Hz-5
off on on off C10 MULTI Hz-6 Setting
off on on on C11 MULTI Hz-7 Setting
on off off off C12 MULTI Hz-8 0.00 to
on off off on C13 MULTI Hz-9 - 120.00 Hz
on off on off C14 MULTI Hz-10
on off on on C15 MULTI Hz-11
on on off off C16 MULTI Hz-12
on on off on C17 MULTI Hz-13
on on on off C18 MULTI Hz-14
on on on on C19 MULTI Hz-15
Combination of
Input Signals Selected Frequency
Acceleration and Deceleration time selection
Value 4, 5: The acceleration and deceleration time can
be switched to a preset time in function codes E10 to
E15 by switching the external digital input signal. Assign
values 4 and 5 to the target digital input terminal. The
combination of input signals determines the acceleration
and deceleration times.
5 4
(RT2) (RT1)
off off F07 ACC TIME1
F08 DEC TIME1 Related
off on E10 ACC TIME2 Functions
E11 DEC TIME2 E10-E15
on off E12 ACC TIME3 Setting Range
E13 DEC TIME3 0.01 to 3600s
on on E14 ACC TIME4
E15 DEC TIME4
Combination
of Input Signals
Selected Acceleration /
Deceleration Times
5-19
Self-hold selection (HLD)
Value 6: This selection is used for 3-wire operation. The
FWD or REV signal is self-held when HLD-CM is on, and
this self-hold is cleared when HLD-CM is turned off. To
use this HLD terminal function, assign 6 to the target
digital input terminal.
Coast-to-stop command (BX)
Value 7: When BX and CM are connected, drive output is
cut off immediately, and the motor starts to coast to a
stop. An alarm signal is neither output nor self-held. If
BX and CM are disconnected when the operation
command (FWD or REV) is on, operation begins at the
start frequency. To use this BX terminal function, assign
value 7 to the target digital input terminal.
Alarm reset (RST)
Value 8: If a drive trip occurs, connecting RST to CM
clears the alarm output (for any fault). Disconnecting
them clears the trip indication and restarts operation. To
use this RST terminal function, assign value 8 to the
target digital input terminal.
External alarm (THR)
Value 9: Disconnecting THR and CM during operation
cuts off drive output (i.e., motor starts to coast to a stop)
and outputs alarm OH2, which is self-held internally and
cleared by RST input. This function is used to protect an
external brake resistor and other components from
overheating. To use this THR terminal function, assign
value 9 to the target digital input terminal. ON input is
assumed if this terminal function is not set.
Jogging (JOG)
Value 10: This function is used for jogging operation to
position a workpiece. When JOG and CM are con-
nected, the
operation is performed with the jogging frequency set in
function code C20 while the operation command (FWD-
CM or REV-CM) is on. To use this JOG terminal function,
assign 10 to the target digital input terminal.
Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1
Value 11: This function switches the frequency setting
method defined by function codes F01 and C30 using an
external digital input signal.
Input Signal Selected Frequency Setting
11
off F01 FREQ CMD1
on C30 FREQ CMD2
Motor 2/Motor 1
Value 12: This function switches motor constants using
an external digital input signal.
This input is effective only when the operation command
to the drive is off and operation has stopped and does
not apply to the operation at 0Hz.
Input Signal Selected Motor
12
off Motor 1
on Motor 2
Related Functions: A01-A18
DC injection brake command (DCBRK)
Value 13: This function is used for DC Brake time control
by digital input including extending braking operation
during stopping as well as during start up into a rotating
load. When the external digital input signal is on, DC
injection braking starts when the drives output frequency
drops below the frequency preset in function code F20
after the operation command goes off. (The operation
command goes off when the STOP key is pressed during
keypad panel operation or when both terminals FWD and
REV go off during terminal block operation.) The DC
injection braking continues while the digital input signal
is on. In this case, the longer of the following times is
selected:
- The time set with function code F22
- The time during which the input signal is set ON
Input Signal Selected Operation
13
off DC injection brake command not given
on DC injection brake command given
FWD
REV
HLD
CM
FWD
REV
STOP
Output
Frequency
DC Brake
Frequency
DC Brake
FWD-CM
DCBRK-CM
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
Forward
rotation
ON
ON ON
ON ON
FWD-CM
REV-CM
BX-CM
Output
Frequency
Ignored
Forward
rotation
Forward
rotation
5-20
Edit permission command (data change
permission)(WE-KP) (data protection)
Value 19: This function allows the data to be changed
only when input is received from an external signal,
thereby preventing function code data changes.
19 Selected Function
off Prohibit data changes
on Allow data changes
Note: If a terminal is assigned the value 19, the data
cannot be changed. To change data, turn the terminal on
and change its setting to another number.
PID control cancellation (Hz/PID)
Value 20: The PID control can be disabled by an external
digital input signal.
Input Signal Selected Function
20 [Related Functions: H20-H25]
off Enable PID control
on Disable PID control
(When the PID control is disabled, the frequency is set
from keypad panel)
Normal operation/inverse
Value 21: Analog input (Terminals 12 and C1) can be
switched between normal and inverse operations using an
external digital input signal.
Input Signal Selected Function
21 [Related Function: F01]
off
Normal operation if normal operation is
set and vice versa
on
Inverse operation if normal operation is
set and vice versa
Interlock (52-2)
Value 22: When a contactor is installed on the output side
of the drive, the contactor opens at the time of a momen-
tary power failure. This prevents the reduction of the DC
circuit voltage and may prevent the detection of a power
failure and a correct restart operation after power is
recovered. The restart operation, in the event of a
momentary power failure, can be performed effectively
with power failure information provided by an external
digital input signal.
Torque limit 2/torque limit 1
Value 14: Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1. This
function switches the torque limit value set with function
codes F40, F41, E16, and E17, using an external digital
input signal.
Input Signal
14
off F40 DRV TRQ1 Related Functions
F41 BRK TRQ1 F40-F41, E16-E17
Setting Range
on E16 DRV TRQ2 DRV 20 to 200% ,999
E17 DRV TRQ2 BRK0, 20 to 200%, 999
Selected Torque Limit Value
Switching operation from line drive
(60Hz)(SW60)/(50Hz)(SW50)
Value 15, 16: Motor operation can be switched from 60
Hz/50 Hz commercial power to drive operation without
stopping the motor by switching the external digital input
signal.
Input Signal Function
16
off > on Drive operation to line operation (60 Hz)/(50 Hz)
on > off Line operation to drive operation (60 Hz)/(50 Hz)
Following a momentary power failure, if the digital input
signal goes off, 50 or 60 Hz (according to the input
signal) is output after the restart waiting time (function
code H13). The motor is then directed to drive opera-
tion.
UP command (UP)/DOWN command (DOWN)
Value 17, 18: When an operation command is input (on),
the output frequency can be increased or decreased
using an external digital input signal.
The change ranges from 0 to maximum frequency.
Operation in the opposite direction, of the operation
command is not allowed.
Selected Function
(when operation command is on)
18 17
off off Holds the output frequency
off on
on off
on on Holds the output frequency
Increases the output frequency
according to the acceleration time
Decreases the output frequency
according to the deceleration time
Combination
of Input Signals
There are the two types of UP/DOWN operations as
shown below. Select the desired type by setting the
frequency (F01 or C30).
5-21
Input Signal Function
22
off
No momentary power failure detection by
digital input
on
Momentary power failure detection by
digital input
Torque control cancellation (Hz/TRQ)
Value 23: If function code H18 Torque control is set to
active (value = 1 or 2), this operation can be cancelled
externally by assigning 23 to the target digital input
terminal and switching between active and inactive for
this input signal.
Input Signal Selected Function
23 [Related Function: H18]
off Torque control function active the input voltage to
Terminal 12 is the torque command value
on Torque control function inactive - the input voltage to
Terminal 12 is the frequency command value. PID
feedback amount when PID control operation is
selected (H20 = 1 or 2).
Link Operation selection (LE)
Value 24: Frequency and operation commands from the
data communications link can be enabled or disabled by
switching the external digital input signal. Select the
command source in H30-Link function and assign 24 to
the target digital input terminal to enable or disable
commands in this input signal state.
Input Signal Selected Function
24 [Related Function: H30]
off Link command disabled
on Link command enabled
Universal DI (U-DI)
Value 25: Assigning 25 to a digital input terminal renders
the terminal a universal DI terminal. The ON/OFF state of
signal input to this terminal can be checked through the
RS485 and BUS option.
This input terminal is only used to check for an incoming
input signal through communication and does not affect
drive operation.
Pick up start mode (STM)
Value 26: The (pick-up start mode): in function code H09
can be enabled or disabled by switching the external
digital input signal. Assign 26 to the target digital input
terminal to enable or disable the function in this input
signal state.
Input Signal Selected Function
26 [Related Function: H09]
off Start characteristic function disabled
on Start characteristic function enabled
Timed alarm stop command (STOP1)
Timed alarm stop command with deceleration
time 4 (STOP2)
Value 30, 31: Disconnecting STOP1 and CM during
operation, the drive decelerates and stops by a present
deceleration time (STOP1)/deceleration time 4 (STOP2)
setting and then outputs alarm Er6 which is latched
internally and cleared by RST input. ON input is assumed
when this terminal function is not set.
Factory Settings at Shipment
Description
Terminal X1 0 Multi-step frequency selection (SS1)
Terminal X2 1 Multi-step frequency selection (SS2)
Terminal X3 2 Multi-step frequency selection (SS4)
Terminal X4 3 Multi-step frequency selection (SS8)
Terminal X5 4 Acceleration and deceleration selection (RT1)
Terminal X6 5 Acceleration and deceleration selection (RT2)
Terminal X7 6 Self-hold selection (HLD)
Terminal X8 7 Coast-to-stop command (BX)
Terminal X9 8 Alarm reset (RST)
Value
Digital
Input
5-22
E10 Acceleration time 2
E11 Deceleration time 2
E12 Acceleration time 3
E13 Deceleration time 3
E14 Acceleration time 4
E15 Deceleration time 4
E 1 0 A C C T I M E 2
E 1 1 D E C T I M E 2
E 1 2 A C C T I M E 3
E 1 3 D E C T I M E 3
E 1 4 A C C T I M E 4
E 1 5 D E C T I M E 4
Acceleration time1 (F07) and Deceleration time1 (F08), as
well as three other acceleration and deceleration times,
can be selected.
The operation and setting ranges are the same as those
for Acceleration time1 and Deceleration time1. See
explanations for F07 and F08.
For switching acceleration and deceleration times, select
any two terminals (from Terminal X1 in E01 to Terminal X9
in E09) as switching signal input terminals. Set the
selected terminals to 4 (acceleration and deceleration
time1) and 5 (acceleration and deceleration time2) and
input a signal to each terminal to switch acceleration and
deceleration times. Switching is possible during
acceleration, deceleration, or constant speed operation.
Example: When Terminals X2 and X3 are set to 4 and 5:
E16 Torque limit 2 (drive)
E17 Torque limit 2 (brake)
E 1 6 D R V T R Q 2
E 1 7 B R K T R Q 2
This function is used to switch the torque limit level set
by F40 and F41, using an external control signal. Input
an external signal by setting any of the digital input
terminals (X1 to X9) to 14 for Torque limit 2 / Torque limit
1 in E01 to E09.
E20 Terminal Y1 (function selection)
E24 Terminals Y5A and Y5C (funtion selection)
E 2 0 Y 1 F U N C
E 2 1 Y 2 F U N C
E 2 2 Y 3 F U N C
E 2 3 Y 4 F U N C
E 2 4 Y 5 F U N C
Some control and monitor signals can be selected and
output from terminals Y1 to Y5. Terminals Y1 to Y4 use
transistor output; terminals Y5A and Y5C use relay
contacts.
Value Output Signal
0 Drive Running (RUN)
1 Frequency arrival (FAR)
2 Frequency detection (FDT1)
3 Stopping due to undervoltage (LV)
4 Torque polarity detection (B/D)
5 Torque limiting (TL)
6 Restart after momentary power failure (IPF)
7 Overload - early warning (OLI)
8 Keypad panel operation (KP)
9 Drive stopping (STP)
10 Ready for operation (RDY)
11 Switching between line and drive (SW88)
12 Switching between line and drive (SW52-2)
13 Switching between line and drive (SW52-1)
14 Motor 2 switching (SWM2)
15 Terminal AX function (AX)
16 Pattern operation stage change (TU)
17 Pattern operation cycle operation completed (TO)
18 Pattern operation stage number (STG1)
19 Pattern operation stage number (STG2)
20 Pattern operation stage number (STG4)
21 Alarm detail (AL1)
22 Alarm detail (AL2)
23 Alarm detail (AL4)
24 Alarm detail (AL8)
25 Cooling fan operating (FAN)
26 Retry function operating (TRY)
27 Universal DO (U-DO) *
28 Heat sink overheat - early warning (OH)
29 Synchronization completed by synchronous operation
card (SY) *
30 unused
31 2nd Freq. level detection (FDT2)
32 2nd OL level early warning (OL2)
33 Terminal C1 off signal (C1OFF)
Note: For output signals marked *, refer to instruction
manuals for RTU communication and the synchronous
operation card.
5-23
Drive running (RUN)
Value 0: The RUN signal is output when there is output
speed (drive is outputting a frequency). When the DC
injection brake function is active, the RUN signal is off.
Frequency arrival (FAR)
Value 1: See the explanation for function code E30
(frequency arrival [detection width]).
Frequency detection (FDT1)
Value 2: See the explanation for function codes E31 and
E32 (frequency detection).
Stopping due to undervoltage (LV)
Value 3: If the undervoltage protective function activates,
i.e. if the main circuit DC voltage falls below the
undervoltage detection level, an ON signal is output. The
signal goes off when the voltage recovers and increases
above the detection level. The ON signal is retained as
long as the undervoltage protective function is active.
Undervoltage detection level: 230V series: 200V
460V series: 400V
Torque polarity detection (B/D)
Value 4: This function determines the torque polarity
calculated in the drive and outputs a signal indicating
driving or braking torque. An OFF signal is output for
driving torque; an ON signal is output for braking torque.
Torque limiting (TL)
Value 5: When torque limiting is active, the stall preven-
tion function is automatically activated to change the
output frequency. The torque limiting signal is output to
lighten the load and also used to display overload
conditions on the monitor device. This ON signal is
output while the current or torque is limited or power
regeneration is prevented.
Restart after momentary power failure (IPF)
Value 6: Following a momentary power failure, this
function reports the start of restart mode, the occurrence
of an automatic pull-in, and the completion of the
recovery operation.
Following a momentary power failure, an ON signal is
output when power is recovered and a synchronization
(pull-in) operation is performed. The signal goes off after
a frequency level equal to that prior to power failure has
been recovered.
For 0 Hz restart at power recovery, no signal is output
because synchronization ends when power is recovered.
The frequency is not recovered to the level before the
power failure occurred.
Overload early warning (OL1)
Value 7: Before the motor is stopped by a trip operation
of an electronic thermal O/L relay, this function outputs
an ON signal when the load reaches the overload early
warning level.
Either the electronic thermal O/L relay early warning or
output current overload early warning can be selected.
For setting procedure, see E33 Overload early warning
(operation selection) and E34 Overload early warning
(operation level).
Note: This function is only effective for Motor 1.
Keypad panel operation
Value 8: An ON signal is output when the operation
command keys (FWD, REV and STOP) on the keypad
panel can be used (i.e., F02 Operation = 0) to issue
operation and stop commands.
Drive stopping (STOP)
Value 9: This function outputs an inverted signal to RUN
to indicate zero speed. An ON signal is output when the
DC injection brake function is operating.
Ready for operation (RDY)
Value 10: This function outputs an ON signal when the
drive is ready to operate. The drive is ready to operate
after the main circuit and control circuit power have been
established where the drive protective function is not
activated.
About one second is required from power-on to ready for
operation under normal conditions.
Switching between the AC line and the drive
(SW88)(SW52-2)(SW52-1)
Value 11, 12, 13: To perform a transfer between the line
and the drive, the relay sequence can be accomplished
using values 11, 12 and 13 on the Y outputs. These
values will provide outputs that can be used for opening
and closing contactors in the transfer sequence. For a
detailed explanation of these outputs please refer to the
factory.
Motor 2 switching (SWM2)
Value 14: When a signal for switching to Motor 2 is input
from the terminal selected by Terminals X1 to X9, this
function selects and outputs the signal to switch the
magnetic contactor for the motor. Since this switching
signal is not output during running, including when the DC
injection braking function is operating, a signal must be re-
input after output stops.
Terminal AX function (AX)
Value 15: When an operation command (FWD or REV) is
entered, this function outputs an ON signal. When a stop
command is entered, the signal goes off after drive output
stops. When a coast-to-stop command is entered, and
the drive protective function is operating, the signal goes
off immediately.
Pattern operation stage change (TU)
Value 16: When the pattern operation stage changes, this
function outputs a one-shot, 100ms ON signal to report a
stage change.
5-24
Pattern operation cycle operation completed
(TO)
Value 17: After the seven stages of a pattern operation
have been completed, this function outputs a one-shot,
100 ms ON signal to report the completion of all stages.
Pattern operation stage number
(STG1)(STG2)(STG4)
Value 18, 19, 20: During pattern operation, this function
reports the stage (operation process) being operated.
Pattern
Operation
Stage No. STG1 STG2 STG4
Stage 1 on off off
Stage 2 off on off
Stage 3 on on off
Stage 4 off off on
Stage 5 on off on
Stage 6 off on on
Stage 7 on on on
Output Terminal
When pattern operation is not activated (i.e., no stage has
been selected), the terminals do not output a signal.
Alarm detail (AL1)(AL2)(AL4)(AL8)
Value 21, 22, 23, 24: This function reports the operating
status of the drive protective function.
Alarm Detail
(Drive Protective Function AL1 AL2 AL4 AL8
Overcurrent, ground fault, blown fuse on off off off
Overvoltage off on off off
Undervoltage shortage, input phase
failure
on on off off
Motor 1 and Motor 2 overload off off on off
drive overload on off on off
Heat sink overheating, drive
overheating internally
off on on off
External alarm input, braking resistor
overheating
on on on off
Memory error, CPU error off off off on
Keypad panel communication error,
option communication error
on off off on

Option error off on off on
Output wiring error off off on on
RTU communication error on off on on
Overspeed, PG disconnection off on on on
Output Terminal
Under normal operation, terminals do not output a signa
Cooling fan operating (FAN)
Value 25: When used with H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF
control, this function outputs a signal while the cooling fan
is operating.
Retry function operating (TRY)
Value 26: When H04 Retry operating is set to 1 or higher,
the signal is output during the retry operation, if the drive
protective function has been activated.
Universal DO(U-DO)
Value 27: Assigning a value of 27 to a transistor output
terminal renders the terminal a universal DO terminal.
This function enables ON/OFF through the RS485 and
BUS option.
This function serves only to turn the transistor output on
or off through communication and is not related to drive
operation.
Heat sink overheat early warning (OH)
Value 28: This function outputs an early warning signal
when the heat sink temperature (overheat detection level)
is within 10C of the overtemp trip point.
2nd Freq. level detection (FDT2)
Vallue 31: This function sets the 2nd Freq. level detection.
See the explanation of Function Code E36 and E37
Hysteresis width is same as FDT1 (E32).
2nd OL level early warning (OL2)
Value 32: This function sets the 2nd overload early
warning. See the explanation of overload early warning
(OL), E37.
Terminal C1 off signal (C1OFF)
Value 33: This function outputs an ON signal, when the
C1 current input is smaller than 2mA.
Y1-Y5 SETTINGS WHEN SHIPPED FROM THE FACTORY
Digital Output
Value Description
Terminal Y1 0 Operating (RUN)
Terminal Y2 1 Frequency arrival (FAR)
Terminal Y3 2 Frequency detection (FDT)
Terminal Y4 7 Overload early warning (OL)
Terminal Y5 15 Terminal AX function (AX)
Factory Setting at Shipment
E25 Y5 Ry operation mode
E 2 5 Y 5 R Y M O D E
This function specifies whether to excite the Y5 relay at
ON signal mode or OFF signal mode
Set Value Operation
0 At OFF signal mode Y5A - Y5C: OFF
At ON signal mode Y5A - Y5C: ON
1 At OFF signal mode Y5A - Y5C: ON
At ON signal mode Y5A - Y5C: OFF
5-25
E33 Overload early warning (operation)
E 3 3 O L L E V E L
Setting range: 0: Electronic thermal O/L relay
Select one of the following two types of overload early
warning: early warning by electronic thermal O/L relay
function or early warning by output current.
1: Output current
Value Function Description
0 Electronic
thermal
O/L relay
Overload early warning by electronic thermal
O/L relay (with inverse time characteristics)
to output current. The operation selection and
thermal time constant for the inverse time
characteristics are the same as those of the
electronic thermal O/L relay for motor
protection (F10 and F12).
1 Output
current
An overload early warning is issued when
output current exceeds the set current value
for the set time.
E34 Overload early warning (operation level)
E 3 4 O L 1 L E V E L
Setting range: Drive rated output current x (5 to 150%)
This function determines the operation level for the
electronic thermal O/L relay or output current.
The operation release level is 90% of the set value.
E35 Overload early warning (operation time)
E 3 5 O L T I M E R
Setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
This function is used when E33 Overload early warning
(operation selection) is set to 1.
Sets the time from when the operation level is attained
until the overload early warning function is activated.
E36 Frequency detection 2 (operation level)
E 3 6 F D T 2 L E V E L
This function determines the operation (detection) level 2
of the output frequency for operation release. This
function operates the same as E31 Frequency detection
1 (operation level). For details, see the explanation for
E31.
E37 Overload early warning 2
(operationlevel)
E 3 7 O L 2 L E V E L
This function determines the operation level 2 of the
output current. This function operates same as E33
output current and E35 setting.
When the set value is 1, contacts Y5A and Y5C are
connected when the drive control voltage is established
(about one second after power on).
E30 Frequency arrival (detection width)
E 3 0 F A R H Y S T R
Setting range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
This function adjusts the detection width when the output
frequency is the same as the set operating frequency. The
detection width can be adjusted from 0 to 10 Hz of the
setting frequency.
When the frequency is within the detection width, an ON
signal can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to
[Y5]
E31 Frequency detection (operation level)
E32 Frequency detection (hysteresis width)
E 3 1 F D T L E V E L
E 3 2 F D T H Y S T R
Setting range (Operation level): 0 to 120 Hz
These functions determine the operation level of the
output frequency and hysteresis width for operation
release. If the output frequency exceeds the set operation
level, an ON signal can be output from terminals Y1 to Y5.
(Hysteresis width): 0.0 to 30.0 Hz
5-26
E40 Display coefficient A
E41 Display coefficient B
E 4 0 C O E F A
E 4 1 C O E F B
Setting range:
Display coefficient A: -999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00
Display coefficient B: -999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00
These coefficients are conversion coefficients which are
used to determine the load and line speed and the PID
controller target value and feedback (process) amount
displayed on the LED monitor.
Load and line speed
Use display coefficient A.
Displayed value = output frequency x (0.01 to 200.00)
Although the setting range is 999.00, the effective range
of display data is 0.01 to 200.00. Therefore, values
smaller or larger than this range are limited to a minimum
value of 0.01 or a maximum value of 200.00.
Target value and feedback amount of PID controller
Set the maximum value of display data in E40 Display
coefficient A and the minimum value in E41 Display
coefficient B.
Displayed value = (target value or feedback amount)
x (Display coefficient A - B) + B
E42 Display filter
E 4 2 D I S P L A Y F L
Setting range: 0.0 to 5.0 seconds
Among data in E43 LED monitor (display selection), some
data need not be displayed instantaneously when the data
changes. For such data, a flicker suppression filter can be
used.
Monitored items in E43 LED monitor (display selection)
Value Display Value Display
3 Output current 8 Calculated torque value
4 Output voltage 9 Power consumption
E43 LED monitor (display selection)
E44 LED monitor (display at stopping)
E 4 3 L E D M N T
E 4 4 L E D M N T 2
The data during drive operation, stopping, at frequency
setting, and at PID setting is displayed on the LED.
Display during running and stopping
During running, the items selected in E43 LED monitor
(display selection) are displayed. In E44 LED monitor
(display at stopping), specify whether to display selected
items or the same items as during running.
Value of
E43
0
set
frequency
value (Hz)
1
set
frequency
value (Hz)
2
3
4
5
synchronous
speed set
value (rpm)
6
line speed
set value
(m/min)
7
set load
speed (rpm)
8
9
10
11
12
output frequency after slip
compensation (Hz)
output frequency after slip
compensation (Hz)
E44 = 1 E44 = 0
output power (kW)
set frequency value (Hz)
output current (A)
output voltage command value (V)
synchronous speed (rpm)
PID target value 1 (direct input from keypad panel)
PID target value 2 (input from F02 Frequency 1)
PID feedback amount
during
running
at stopping
during
running
at stopping
line speed (m/min)
load speed (rpm)
calculated torque value (%)
Note: For E43 = 10 to 12, the data is displayed only if
selected in H20 PID control (operation selection).
Display at frequency setting
When a set frequency is checked or changed by the
keypad panel, the value shown below is displayed.
Select the display item by using E43 LED monitor (display
selection). This display is not affected by E44 LED monitor
(display at stopping).
Value of E43 Frequency Setting
0,1,2,3,4 set value of frequency (Hz)
5 set value of synchronous speed (rpm)
6 set value of line speed (m/min.)
7 set value of load speed (rpm)
8,9 set value of frequency (Hz)
10,11,12 set value of frequency (Hz)
Note: For E43 = 10 to 12 the data is displayed only if
selected in H20 PID control (operation selection).
5-27
E45 LCD monitor (display selection)
E 4 5 L C D M N T R
This function selects the items to be displayed on the
LCD monitor in operation mode.
Value Display Items
0
Operation status, direction of rotation,
operation guide
1
Output frequency before slip compensation,
output current, calculated torque in bar graph
Set value: 0
During running When stopping
E 4 6
E 4 7
E46 LCD monitor (language)
E 4 6 L A N G U A G E
This function selects the language for data display on the
LCD monitor.
Value Language Value Language
0 Japanese 3 French
1 English 4 Spanish
2 German 5 Italian
Note: English language is used for all LCD screens in
this manual.
E47 LCD monitor (contrast adjustment)
E 4 7 C O N T R A S T
This function adjusts the LCD contrast. Increase the set
value to raise contrast and decrease to lower contrast.
Value 0, 1, 2 8, 9, 10
Screen Low High
60.00
STOP
PRG PRG
MENU
F/D LED SHIFT
60.00
Hz
A
%
Fout/Iout/TRQ
60.00
RUN
FWD
Set value: 1
Full scale value of bar graph
Display item Full scale
Output frequency Maximum frequency
Output current 200% of drive rated value
Calculated torque value 200% of motor rated value
Note: The scale cannot be adjusted.
5-28
This function makes the set frequency jump so that the
drives output frequency does not match the mechanical
resonance point of the load.
Up to three jump points can be set.
This function is ineffective if jump frequencies 1 to 3 are
set to 0 Hz.
A jump does not occur during acceleration or decelera-
tion.
If a jump frequency setting range overlaps another range,
both ranges are added to determine the actual jump area.
C05-C19 Multi-step frequency 1 to 15
C 0 5 M U L T I H z 1
C 0 6 M U L T I H z 2
C 0 7 M U L T I H z 3
C 0 8 M U L T I H z 4
C 0 9 M U L T I H z 5
C 1 0 M U L T I H z 6
C 1 1 M U L T I H z 7
C 1 2 M U L T I H z 8
C 1 3 M U L T I H z 9
C 1 4 M U L T I H z 1 0
C 1 5 M U L T I H z 1 1
C 1 6 M U L T I H z 1 2
C 1 7 M U L T I H z 1 3
C 1 8 M U L T I H z 1 4
C 1 9 M U L T I H z 1 5
C01 Jump frequency 1
C02 Jump frequency 2
C03 Jump frequency 3
C04 Jump frequency hysteresis
C: Control Functions of Frequency
Jump frequency 3

Jump frequency 2

Output frequency
(Hz)
Jump frequency
width
Jump frequency
width
Jump frequency
width
Jump frequency 1
Set frequency (Hz)

Output Frequency
(Hz)
FWD-CM
SS1-CM
SS2-CM
SS4-CM
SS8-CM
ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON
ON
C05
C13
C12
C11
C10
C09
C08
C07
C06
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19

Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 1
Set frequency (Hz)
Jump frequency
width

Output frequency
(Hz)

Actual
jump width
Setting range: 0 to 120 Hz in 1Hz increments (min.)
C 0 4 J U M P H Y S T R
Setting range: 0 to 30 Hz in 1Hz increments (min.)
C 0 1 J U M P H z 1
C 0 2 J U M P H z 2
C 0 3 J U M P H z 3
Setting range: 0 to 120 Hz In 0.01 Hz increments (min.)
Multistep frequencies 1 to 15 can be switched by turning
terminal functions SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8 on and off.
(See E01 to E09 for terminal function definitions.)
OFF is the default value any undefined SS1, SS2, SS4,
and SS8 terminals.
Related functions: E01 to E09 (Set value: 0 to 3)
5-29
C20 Jog frequency
C 2 0 J O G H z
Setting range: 0.00 to 120.00 Hz
This function sets a frequency for the motor jogging
operation, which is different from the normal operation.
The jogging frequency is used for operation when the
jogging mode signal is received from the keypad panel or
control terminal. For details, see the explanations of
E01 Terminal X1 to E09 Terminal X9.
C21 Pattern operation (operation selection)
C 2 1 P A T T E R N
Pattern operation is an automatic operation according to
a preset operation time, direction of rotation, accelera-
tion and deceleration time, and frequency.
When using this function, set F01 Frequency setting to
10 (pattern operation).
[Related Functions: F01, C30 = 10]
The following operation patterns can be selected.
Value Operation Pattern
0 Perform a pattern operation cycle, then stop
operation.
1 Perform pattern operation repeatedly.
Operation is stopped by the STOP operation.
2 Perform a pattern operation cycle, then
continue operation at the last set frequency.
C22-C28 Pattern operation (stage 1 to 7)
C 2 2 S T A G E 1
C 2 3 S T A G E 2
C 2 4 S T A G E 3
C 2 5 S T A G E 4
C 2 6 S T A G E 5
C 2 7 S T A G E 6
C 2 8 S T A G E 7
Seven stages are operated in order of function codes,
according to the values set in C22 Pattern operation
(stage 1) to C28 Pattern operation (stage 7). Each
function sets the operation time and the direction of
rotation for each stage and assigns values to acceleration
and deceleration time.
Set or assign item Value range
Operation time 0. 00 to 6000s
Rotation F: Forward (counterclockwise)
direction R: Reverse (clockwise)
Acceleration and 1: Acceleration time 1 (F07)
deceleration time Deceleration time 1 (F08)
2: Acceleration time 2 (E10)
Deceleration time 2 (E11)
3: Acceleration time 3 (E12)
Deceleration time 3 (E13)
4: Acceleration time 4 (E14)
Deceleration time 4 (E15)
Note: The operation time is represented by the three
most significant digits, hence, can be set with
only three high-order digits.
Set the operation time to 0.00 for any unused stages,
which are skipped during operation.
In regard to the set frequency value, the multi-step
frequency function is assigned according to the table
below. Seven frequencies can be set for C05 Multi-step
frequency 1 to C11 Multi-step frequency 7.
Stage No. Operation Frequency
Stage 1 Multi-step frequency 1 (C05)
Stage 2 Multi-step frequency 2 (C06)
Stage 3 Multi-step frequency 3 (C07)
Stage 4 Multi-step frequency 4 (C08)
Stage 5 Multi-step frequency 5 (C09)
Stage 6 Multi-step frequency 6 (C10)
Stage 7 Multi-step frequency 7 (C11)
Setting example
100 F 3
Acceleration and deceleration
time (code): 3
Motor rotating direction:
Forward (counterclockwise)
Operation time: 100s
5-30
Pattern operation example
FunctionValue / Operation Frequency
C21 1 Selects function
C22 (stage 1) 60.0F2 Multi-step frequency 1 (C05)
C23 (stage 2) 100F1 Multi-step frequency 2 (C06)
C24 (stage 3) 65.5R4 Multi-step frequency 3 (C07)
C25 (stage 4) 55.0R3 Multi-step frequency 4 (C08)
C26 (stage 5) 50.0F2 Multi-step frequency 5 (C09)
C27 (stage 6) 72.0F4 Multi-step frequency 6 (C10)
C28 (stage 7) 35.0F2 Multi-step frequency 7 (C11)
The following diagram shows this operation.
Running and stopping are controlled by pressing the
STOP or FWD keys or by opening and closing the control
terminals.
When using the keypad panel, the FWD key starts
operation. The STOP key pauses stage advance. Pressing
the FWD key again will restart operation from the stop
point according to the stages. If an alarm stop occurs,
press the RESET key to release the drive protective
function, then press the FWD key to restart stage ad-
vance.
If operation is to restart from the first stage, C22 Pattern
operation (stage 1), enter a STOP command and press
the RESET key.
If an alarm stop occurs, press the RESET key to release
the protective function, then press the RESET key again.
C33 Analog setting signal
C 3 3 R E F F I L T E R
Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 seconds
Analog signals input from Terminals 12, V2 or C1 may
contain noise which renders the control unstable. This
function adjusts the time constant of the input filter to
remove the effects of noise.
A value that is set too large delays control response
although stabilizing the control. A value that is set too
small speeds up control response but renders the control
unstable.
If the optimum value is not known, adjust the setting if
the control is unstable or response is delayed.
Note:
The set value is commonly applied to Terminals 12, V2
and C1. For input of PID feedback, the PID control
feedback filter (H25) is used.
Notes:
1. The direction of rotation cannot be reversed by a
command issued from the REV key on the keypad
panel or Terminal REV. Any reverse rotation com-
mands entered will be canceled. Select forward or
reverse rotation by the data in each stage. If the
control terminals are used for operation, the self-hold
function will not work. Select an alternate type switch
when using control terminals.
2. At the end of a cycle, the motor decelerates to stop
according to the value set in F08 Deceleration time 1.
C30 Frequency setting 2
C 3 0 F R E Q C M D 2
For the setting method, see the explanation for F01.
Notes: Setting 2, 3, and 7 are inactive. (C1 signals)
This function determines the frequency setting method.
C31 Analog input bias adjustment
The setting range is -100.0 to +100.0% (in 0.1% incre-
ments) of the maximum output frequency.
C32 Analog input gain adjustment
The gain adjustment range is 0.0 to 200%.
C 3 1 B I A S
C 3 2 G A I N
These functions set the gain and bias for analog input
Terminals 12, in conjunction with functions F17 (freq. gain)
and F18 (freq. bias).
For details, see the explanation for F17 and F18.
5-31
Notes
5-32
Motor 1 (P: Motor Parameters)
P01 Number of motor 1 poles
P 0 1 M 1 P O L E S
Setting range:: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
This function sets the number of poles in Motor 1. If this
setting is not made, an incorrect motor speed (synchro-
nous speed) is displayed on the LED.
P02 Motor 1 (capacity)
P 0 2 M 1 C A P
Set values for models with nominal motor capacity of
30Hp or less: 0.01 to 60Hp
Set values for models with nominal motor capacity of
40Hp or more: 0.01 to 800Hp
The nominal motor capacity is set at the factory. This
setting should only be changed when driving a motor with
a different capacity.
Set the nominal motor capacity listed in 9-1 Standard
Specifications. A value in the range from two ratings lower
to one rating higher than the nominal motor capacity can
be set. If a value outside this range is set, accurate
control cannot be guaranteed. If a value between two
nominal motor capacities is set, data for the lower
capacity is automatically stored for related function data.
If this function setting is changed, the following related
functions are automatically set to data values for the Fuji
3-phase standard motor.
P03 Motor 1 (rated current)
P06 Motor 1 (no-load current)
P07 Motor 1 (% R1)
P08 Motor 1 (% X1)
Note:
The values for the GE 3-phase standard motor are 230V,
60Hz, 4 poles for the 230V series; 460V, 60Hz, 4 poles for
the 460V series.
P03 Motor 1 (rated current)
P 0 3 M 1 R I -
Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000 A
This function sets the rated current value for Motor 1.
P04 Motor 1 (Tuning)
P 0 4 M 1 T U N 1
This function measures and automatically stores motor
data.
Perform auto tuning if the previously stored data in P06
No-load current, P07 %R1, and P08 %X differs from the
actual motor data. Some typical examples are listed
below. Auto tuning improves control and calculation
accuracy.
When a motor other than the GE standard 3-phase
motor is used, and accurate data is required for close
control.
When output-side impedance cannot be ignored, e.g.
when the cable between the drive and the motor is
too long or when a reactor is connected.
When %R1 or %X is unknown, e.g. when a non-
standard or special motor is used.
Tuning Procedure
1. Adjust the voltage and frequency according to motor
data. Adjust functions F03 Maximum output fre-
quency, F04 Base frequency, F05 Rated voltage, and
F06 Maximum output voltage.
2. First enter motor constants that cannot be tuned. Set
functions P02 Capacity, P03 Rated current, and P06
No-load current (no-load current setting is not
required if P04=2).
3. When tuning the no-load current, beware of motor
rotation.
4. Set function P04 Auto tuning = 1 (motor stop) or 2
(motor rotation). Press the FUNC/DATA key to store
the set value and press the FWD key or REV key.
Tuning will start.
5. Tuning may take several seconds. If P04=2, the motor
accelerates up to half the base frequency according
to acceleration time, is tuned for the no-load current,
and decelerates according to the deceleration time.
The total tuning time varies depending on the settings
for acceleration and deceleration time.
6. Press the STOP key, and the procedure will end.
Note: Use function A13 Motor 2 (auto tuning) to tune
Motor 2. In this case, the set values described in (1) and
(2) above are for functions A01, etc. corresponding to
Motor 2.
WARNING
If the auto tuning value is set to 2, the motor rotates
at a maximum of half the base frequency. Beware of
motor rotation as injury may result.
Value Operation
0 Inactive
1
Measure the motors primary resistance (%R1)
and base frequency leakage reactance (%X) when
the motor is stopping and automatically store both
values in P07 and P08.
2
Measure the motors primary resistance (%R1)
and base frequency leakage reactance (%X) when
the motor is stopping, measure the no-load current
(lo) when the motor is running, and automatically
store these values in P06, P07, and P08.
5-33
P05 Motor 1 (On-line Tuning)
P 0 5 M 1 T U N 2
Long-time operation affects motor temperature and motor
speed. On-line tuning minimizes speed changes related
to these temperature changes.
Value Operation
0 Inactive
1 Active
P06 Motor 1 (no-load current)
P 0 6 M 1 I O
Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000 A
This function sets the no-load current (exciting current) for
Motor 1.
P07 Motor 1 (%R1 setting)
P08 Motor 1 (%X setting)
P 0 7 M 1 % R 1
P 0 8 M 1 % X
These functions are used to set data if using a motor
other than the GE standard 3-phase motor and when the
motor constant and the impedance between the drive and
motor are known.
Calculate %R1 using the following formula:
%R1 =
R1 + CableR
V / ( 3 I )
X 100 [%]
R1: Primary coil resistance value of the motor [W]
Cable R: Output-side cable resistance value [W]
V: Rated voltage [V] I: Rated current [A]
Rated current
%X =
X1 +X2 XM / (X2+XM) + Cable X
V / ( 3 I )
X 100 [%]
X1: Primary leakage reactance of the motor [W]
X2: Secondary leakage reactance (converted to a primary
value) of the motor [W]
XM: Exciting reactance of the motor [W]
Cable X: Output-side cable reactance [W]
V: Rated voltage [V]
I: Rated current [A]
Note:
For reactance, use a value from the data stored in F04
Base frequency 1.
When connecting a reactor or filter to the output circuit,
add its value. Use value 0 for cable values that can be
ignored.
P09 Slip compensation control
P 0 9 S L I P C O M P 1
Setting range: 0.00 to 15.00 Hz
Changes in load torque affect motor slippage, thus
causing variations in motor speed. The slip compensation
control adds a frequency, proportional to motor torque, to
the drive output frequency. This will minimize variations in
motor speed due to changes in torque.
Calculate the amount of slip compensation using the
following formula:
= Base frequency X
Slippage [r/min.]
[Hz]
Synchronous speed [r/min.]
Slippage = Synchronous speed - Rated speed
5-34
H03 Data initializing
H 0 3 D A T A I N I T
Setting rnage: 0: Disabled
1: Initializes data
This function returns all function data changed by the
customer to the original factory settings (initialization).
To perform initialization, press the STOP and ^ keys
together to set H03=1, then press the FUNC/DATA key.
The values for all functions are initialized. The set value
in H03 automatically returns to 0 following the end of
initialization.
H04 Auto-reset (Times)
H05 Auto-reset (Reset interval)
H 0 4 A U T O R E S E T
H 0 5 R E S E T I N T
Set the protective function release count and waiting time
from its startup to release.
Setting range:
(Count) : 0, 1 to 10
(Waiting time) : 2 to 20 seconds
When a drive protective function which invokes the retry
operation is activated, these functions release operation
of the protective function and restarts operation without
issuing an alarm or terminating output.
To disable the retry function, set H04 Retry (count) = 0.
Drive protective functions that can invoke the retry
function:
OC1, OC2, OC3: dBH:
Overcurrent braking resistor overheating
OV1, OV2, OV3: OL1:
Overvoltage Motor 1 overload
OH1: OL2:
Heat sink overheating Motor 2 overload
OH3: OLU:
Drive overheating Drive overload
internally
If the value of H04 Retry (count) is set from 1 to 10, a
drive run command is immediately entered following the
wait time set in H05 Retry (wait time) and the startup of
the retry operation. If the cause of the alarm has been
removed at this time, the drive starts without switching to
alarm mode. If the cause of the alarm still remains, the
protective function is reactivated according to the wait
time set in H05 Retry (waiting time). This operation is
repeated until the cause of the alarm is removed. The
restart operation switches to alarm mode when the retry
count exceeds the value set in H04 Retry (count). The
operation of the retry function can be monitored from
terminals Y1 to Y5.
WARNING
When the retry function is selected, operation will
automatically restart, depending on the cause of
the stop. (The machine should be designed to
ensure safety during a restart.) When the retry
function is selected, GE start software
(F02 set 3 or 4) does not work.
H06 Fan stop operation
H 0 6 F A N S T O P
Setting range: 0: ON/OFF control disabled
1: ON/OFF control enabled
This function specifies whether ON/OFF control for the
cooling fan is automatic. While power is applied to the
drive, the automatic fan control detects the temperature of
the heatsink and turns the fan on or off. When this control
is not selected, the cooling fan rotates continuously.
The cooling fan operating status can be monitored from
terminals Y1 to Y5.
H07 ACC/DEC (Mode select) pattern
H 0 7 A C C P T N
Setting range: 0: Inactive (linear acceleration and
deceleration)
1: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (mild)
2: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (sharp)
3: Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration
This function selects the acceleration and deceleration
pattern.
H: High Performance function
5-35
S-shape Acceleration and Deceleration
This pattern reduces shock by mitigating output frequency
changes at the beginning and end of acceleration and
deceleration.
Pattern constants>
When 1 is
selcted in H07
(mid S-shape
pattern)
When 2 is selcted in
H07 (mid S-shape
pattern)
Range of
S-shaped
0.05 x maximum
output
frequency (Hz)
0.10 x maximum output
frequency (Hz)
Time for
S-shaped at
acceleration
0.10 x
acceleration
time (s)
0.20 x acceleration
time (s)
Time for
S-shaped at
deceleration
0.10 x
deceleration (s)
0.20 x deceleration (s)
*
When acceleration and deceleration times are very long or
short, acceleration and deceleration are almost linear.
Curvilinear Acceleration and Deceleration
This function is used to minimize motor acceleration and
deceleration times in the range that includes a constant
output range.
H08 Rev. phase sequence lock
H 0 8 R E V L O C K
Setting range: 0: Inactive
1: Active
If accidental reversing could result in a malfunction, this
function can be set to prevent reversal.
This function prevents a reversing operation resulting from
a connection between the REV and CM terminals,
inadvertent activation of the REV key, or negative analog
input from Terminals 12 or V1.
H09 Start mode
H 0 9 S T A R T M O D E
Setting range 0, 1, 2
This function smoothly catches a spinning motor which is
coasting after a momentary power failure or after the
motor has been subject to external force, without stop-
ping the motor, i.e. windmilling fan.
At startup, this function detects the motor speed and
outputs the corresponding frequency, thereby enabling a
shock-free motor startup. The normal startup method is
used if the coasting speed of the motor is 120 Hz or more
as a drive frequency and if the value of F03 Maximum
frequency exceeds the value of F15 Frequency limiter
(upper limit).
Restart after a
momentary Line-to-drive
power switching
failure
0 Inactive Inactive Inactive
1 Inactive Active Active
2 Active Active Active
Value
Normal
startup
Explanation
1. This function is effective if F14 Restart after momen-
tary power failure (operation selection) is set to 3, 4,
or 5. This function is also effective when operation is
switched from the line to the drive. The motor is
started with the same frequency as the current
coasting speed (speed search).
2. In addition to restarting following a momentary power
failure and switching between the line and the drive,
this function detects the coasting speed of the motor
and starts the motor at the same frequency as all
startups (including when an ON operation command
is entered).
By assigning 26 (start characteristics selection) to
terminals X1 to X9, this function can be externally
selected as the normal startup method whenever an ON
operation command is entered.
Note: The dotted-dashed line indicates motor speed.
deceleration
Output
frequency
acceleration
Maximum
output
Set
frequency
Base
frequency
0 t [sec]
5-36
H13 Auto-restart (Restart time)
H 1 3 R E S T A R T T
Setting range: 0.1 to 10.0 seconds
Instantaneous switching to another power line (when the
power of an operating motor is cut off or power failure
occurs) creates a large phase difference between the line
voltage and the voltage remaining in the motor, which may
cause electrical or mechanical failure. To rapidly switch
power lines, store the remaining voltage attenuation time
to wait for the voltage remaining in the motor to attenuate.
This function operates at restart after a momentary power
failure.
If the momentary power failure time is shorter than the
wait time value, a restart occurs following the wait time. If
the power failure time is longer than the wait time value, a
restart occurs when the drive is ready to operate (after
about 0.2 to 0.5 seconds).
H14 Auto-restart (freq. fall rate)
H 1 4 F A L L R A T E
Setting range: 0.00, 0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s
If H14 = 0.00, the frequency is reduced according to the
set deceleration time.
This function determines the reduction rate of the output
frequency for synchronizing the drive output frequency
with the motor speed. This function is also used to
reduce the frequency and thereby prevent stalling under a
heavy load during normal operation.
Note:
A frequency reduction rate that is set too large may
temporarily increase the regeneration energy from the load
and invoke the overvoltage protective function. Con-
versely, a rate that is too small extends the operation time
of the current limiting function and may invoke the drive
overload protective function.
H15 Auto-restart (holding DC voltage)
H 1 5 H O L D V
Setting range 230V series: 200 to 300V
460 V series: 400 to 600V
This function is used when F14 Restart after momentary
power failure (operation selection) is set to 2 (decelera-
tion-to-stop at power failure) or 3 (operation continuation).
Either function starts a control operation if the main circuit
DC voltage drops below the set operation continuation
level.
If power supply voltage to the drive is high, control can be
stabilized even under an excessive load by raising the
operation continuation level. However, if the level is too
high, this function activates during normal operation and
causes unexpected motion. Please contact GE Fuji
before changing the factory default value.
H10 Energy-saving operation
H 1 0 E N E R G Y S A V
Setting range: 0: Inactive 1: Active
With constant-speed operation at light loads (fixed output
frequency), this function automatically reduces the output
voltage while minimizing the product of voltage and
current (power).
[Exception: If F09 Torque boost 1 = 0.0]
Notes:
Use this function for variable torque loads (e.g., fans,
pumps). If used for a constant torque load or rapidly
changing load, this function causes a delay in control
response.
The energy-saving operation automatically stops during
acceleration and deceleration or when the torque limiting
function is activated.
H11 DEC mode
H 1 1 D E C M O D E
Setting range: 0: Deceleration-to-stop based on data
set with H07 Non-linear acceleration
and deceleration
1: Coasting-to-stop
This function determines the drive stopping method when
a STOP command is entered.
Note:
This function is effective only when a STOP command is
entered and, therefore, is ineffective if the motor is
stopped by lowering the set frequency.
H12 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting
H 1 2 I N S T C L
Setting range: 0: Inactive 1: Active
An overcurrent trip generally occurs when current flows
above the drive protective level, following a rapid change
in motor load. The instantaneous overcurrent limiting
function controls drive output and prohibits the flow of a
current exceeding the protective level, even if the load
changes.
Since the operation level of the instantaneous overcurrent
limiting function cannot be adjusted, the torque limiting
function must be used.
Motor generation torque may be reduced when instanta-
neous overcurrent limiting is applied. Set this function to
be inactive for equipment such as elevators, which are
adversely affected by reduced motor generation torque, in
which case an overcurrent trip occurs when the current
flow exceeds the drive protective level. A mechanical
brake should be used to ensure safety.
5-37
H16 Auto-restart (OPR command selfhold time)
H 1 6 S E L F H O L D T
Setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 seconds, 999
Since the power to an external operation circuit (relay
sequence) and the main power to the drive is generally cut
off at a power failure, the operation command issued to
the drive is also cut off. This function sets the time an
operation command is to be held in the drive. If a power
failure lasts beyond the self-hold time, power-off is
assumed, automatic restart mode is released, and the
drive starts operation at normal mode when power is
applied again. (This time can be considered to be the
allowable power failure time.)
If H16 = 999, an operation command will be held until
control power in the drive is established or until the main
circuit DC voltage is about 0.
H19 Active drive
H 1 9 A U T R E D
Setting range: 0: Inactive
1: Active
This function automatically extends accelerating time by
60 seconds or longer to prevent an inverter trip resulting
from a temperature rise in the inverter due to overcurrent.
(If the active drive function is activated, the acceleration
time will be three times the selected time.)
H20 PID control (mode select)
H 2 0 P I D M O D E
Setting range: 0: No operation
1: Normal operation
2: Inverse operation
PID control detects the amount of feedback from a sensor
and compares it with the target value (e.g., reference
temperature). If the values differ, this function produces
an output to eliminate the deviation. In other words, this
control matches the feedback amount with the target
value.
This function can be used for flow control, pressure
control, temperature control, and other process controls.
Forward or reverse operations can be selected for PID
controller output. This enables motor revolutions to be
faster or slower according to PID controller output.
5-38
The target value can be entered using F01, Frequency
setting 1, or directly from the keypad panel.
For entry from F01, Frequency setting 1, input a signal to
the selected terminal. For direct entry from the keypad
panel, turn on keypad operation. Select any of the digital
Terminals X1 (E01) to X9 (E09) and assign a value of 11
(frequency setting switching).
NOTE: For the target value and feedback amount, the
process amount can be displayed according to the values
set in E40 Display coefficient A, and E41 Display coeffi-
cient B.
H21 PID control (feedback signal)
H 2 1 F B S I G N A L
This function selects the terminal, direction of operation,
and feedback input. Select a value from the table below
according to sensor specifications.
Value Description
0 Terminal 12, forward operation, 0 to 10V voltage input
1 Terminal C1, forward operation, 4 to 20mA current input
2 Terminal 12, reverse operation, 10 to 0V voltage input
3 Terminal C1, reverse operation, 20 to 4mA current input
Only positive values can be input for this feedback
amount of PID control. Negative values (e.g., 0 to -10V, -
10 to 0V) cannot be input, thereby the function cannot be
used for a reverse operation by an analog signal.
Feedback signal setting (H21) must be different from the
type of setpoint value.
5-39
H22 PID control (P-gain)
H23 PID control (I-gain)
H24 PID control (D-gain)
These functions are not generally used alone but are
combined like P control, PI control, PD control, and PID
control.
P-gain operation
An operation using an output frequency proportional to
deviation is called P operation, which outputs an
operation amount proportional to deviation, though it
cannot eliminate deviation alone.
H 2 2 P G A I N
Setting range: 0.01 to 10.0 times
P (gain) is the parameter that determines the response
level for the deviation of P operation. Although an
increase in gain speeds up response, an excessive gain
causes vibration, and a decrease in gain delays re-
sponse.
I-gain operation
An operation where the change speed of the output
frequency is proportional to the deviation is called an I
operation. An I operation outputs an operation amount as
the integral of deviation and, therefore, has the effect of
matching the feedback control amount to the target value
(e.g., set frequency), though it deteriorates response for
significant changes in deviation.
5-40
H 2 3 I G A I N
Setting range: 0.0 (Inactive), 0.1 to 3600 seconds
H23 I-gain is used as a parameter to determine the
effect of I operation. A longer integration time delays
response and weakens resistance to external elements.
A shorter integration time speeds up response, but an
integration time that is too short causes vibration.
D-gain operation
An operation where the output frequency is proportional
to the deviation differential is called a D operation. It
outputs an operation amount as the deviation differential
and, therefore, is capable of responding to sudden
changes.
H 2 4 D G A I N
Setting range: 0.00 (Inactive), 0.01 to 10.0 seconds
H24 D-gain is used as a parameter to determine the
effect of a D operation. A longer differentiation time
causes vibration by P operation quickly attenuating at
the occurrence of deviation. Excessive differentiation
time could cause vibration. Shortening the differentia-
tion time reduces attenuation at the occurrence of
deviation.
PI control
P operation alone does not remove deviation completely.
P + I control (where I operation is added to P operation)
is normally used to remove the remaining deviation. PI
control always operates to eliminate deviation, even
when the target value is changed or there is a constant
disturbance. When I operation is strengthened, however,
the response for rapidly changing deviation deteriorates.
P operation can also be used individually for loads
containing an integral element.
PD control
If deviation occurs under PD control, an output fre-
quency larger than that of D operation alone occurs
rapidly and prevents the deviation from expanding. For
a small deviation, P operation is restricted. When the
load contains an integral element, P operation alone may
allow responses to vibrate due to the effect of the
integral element, in which case PD control is used to
attenuate the vibration of P operation and stabilize
responses. In other words, this control is applied to
loads in processes without a braking function.
PID control
PID control combines the P operation, the I operation
which removes deviation, and the D operation which
suppresses vibration. This control achieves deviation-
free, accurate, and stable responses.
Adjusting PID value
Adjust the PID value while monitoring the response
waveform on an oscilloscope or other instrument, if
possible. Proceed as follows:
Increase the value of H22 P-gain without generating
vibration.
Decrease the value of H23 I-gain without generating
vibration.
Increase the value of H24 D-gain without generating
vibration.
Adjust the response waveform as follows:
To remove the overshoot, increase the value of H23 I-gain,
then decrease the value of H24 D-gain.
To stabilize response quickly, allowing for min. overshoot,
decrease the value of H23 I-gain or increase the value of
H24 D-gain.
To suppress vibration with a period longer than the value
of H23 I-gain, increase the value of H23.
To suppress vibration with a frequency roughly equivalent
to the value H24 D-gain, decrease the value of H24. If
there is residual vibration with 0.0, decrease the value of
H22 P-gain.
5-41
H25 PID control (Feedback filter)
H 2 5 F B F I L T E R
Setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 seconds
This filter is for feedback signal input from Terminals 12 or
C1. This filter stabilizes operation of the PID control
system. A set value that is too large, however, deterio-
rates response.
H26 PTC thermistor (mode select)
H 2 6 P T C M O D E
Setting range: 0: Inactive
1: Active
Set this function active when the motor has a PTC
thermistor for overheat protection
Connect the PTC thermistor as shown in the figure below.
Turn on switch PTC on the control PCB. The trip mode is
activated by OH2: External thermal relay tripped.
Note: Must be 0 setting when using 4-20mA reference or
feedback signal and the PTC switch must be off.
H27 PTC thermistor (level select)
H 2 7 P T C L E V E L
Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00V
The voltage input to Terminal C1 is compared to the set
voltage level. If the input voltage is equal to or greater
than the set voltage, H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)
starts.
The PTC thermistor has its own alarm temperature. The
internal resistance value of the thermistor largely changes
at the alarm temperature. The operation voltage level is
set using this change in the resistance value.
The figure above for H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)
shows that a 250W resistor and the thermistor (resistance
value Rp) are connected in parallel. Hence, voltage Vc1 at
Terminal C1 can be calculated using the following formula:
Vc1 X 10 [V]
250 Rp
250 + Rp
1000+
250 Rp
250 + Rp
The operation level can be set by bringing Rp in the Vc1
calculation formula into the following range.
Rp1 < Rp < Rp2
To calculate Rp, use the following formula:
Rp
Rp1 + Rp2
[Ohm]
2
5-42
H30 Serial link (Function select)
H 3 0 L I N K F U N C
Setting range: 0 to 3
The link function (communication) provides a standard
RS485 serial interface and optional fieldbus connections.
The serial link function includes:
1) Monitoring (data monitoring, function data check)
2) Frequency setting
3) Operation command (FWD, REV, and other com-
mands for digital input)
4) Write function data
Communication can be enabled and disabled by a digital
input. This function sets the serial link function when
communication is enabled.
Frequency Operation
Command Command
0 Disabled Disabled
1 Enabled Disabled
2 Disabled Enabled
3 Enabled Enabled
Value
The data monitoring and write functions are always
enabled. Disabling communication by a digital input
produces the same results as if this function were set to 0.
If the bus option is installed, this setting selects the bus
function, and the RS485 interface is restricted to monitor-
ing and writing function data. If the bus option is not
installed, this setting selects the RS485 function.
H31 RS485 (Address)
H39 RS485 (Response interval)
These functions set the conditions for RS485 RTU serial
communication. Set the conditions according to the host
device.
H 3 1 A D D R E S S
Setting range: 1 to 247
This function sets the station address of RTU.
Maximum connected devices is 31 for an RS-485 network.
H 3 2 M O D E O N E R
Setting range: 0 to 3
These functions configure the drive behavior in the event
of a communication error.
Value Processing at Communication Error
0 Immediate Er 8 trip (forced stop)
1
Continue operation within timer time, Er 8 trip after
time expires
2
Continue operation and retry within timer time, then
invoke an Er 8 trip if a communication error occurs.
If an error does not occur, continue operation.
3
Continue operation.
H 3 3 T I M E R
Setting range: 0 to 60.0 sec.
This function sets the error processing timer value.
H 3 4 B A U D R A T E
Setting range: 0 to 3
This function sets the baud rate.
Value Baud Rate
0 19200 bits/s
1 9600 bits/s
2 4800 bits/s
3 2400 bits/s
H 3 5 L E N G T H
This function sets data length.
Value Data Length
0 8 bit
.
H 3 6 P A R I T Y
This function sets the parity bit
Value Parity Bit
0 None
1 Even
2 Odd
.
H 3 7 S T O P B I T S
This function sets the stop bit
Value Stop Bit
0 2 bits
1 1 bit
The stop bit is automatically configured by the value of the
parity bit. For parity NONE the stop bit is 2 bits. For
parity EVEN or ODD the stop bit is 1 bit.
5-43
H 3 8 N O R E S T
Setting range: 0 (no detection)
1 to 60 seconds
In a system where the drive is continuously polled within a
specific time, this function detects that access was
stopped due to an open circuit or other network fault and
results in an Er 8 trip.
H 3 9 I N T E R V A L
Setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 second
This function sets the time from when a request is issued
from the host device to when a response is returned.
5-44
A01 Maximum frequency 2
A 0 1 M A X H z 2
This function sets the maximum frequency for Motor 2
output by the drive. It operates the same as F03 Maxi-
mum frequency 1. For details, see the explanation for
F03.
A02 Base frequency 2
A 0 2 B A S E H z 2
This function sets the maximum output frequency in the
constant torque area for Motor 2 (i.e., output frequency at
rated output voltage). It operates the same as F04 Base
frequency 1. For details, see the explanation for F04.
A03 Rated Voltage 2
A 0 3 R A T E D V 2
This function sets the rated voltage output to Motor 2. It
operates the same as F05 Rated voltage 1. For details,
see the explanation for F05.
A04 Maximum Voltage 2
A 0 4 M A X V 2
This function sets the maximum drive output voltage for
Motor 2. It operates the same as F06 Maximum voltage 1.
For details, see the explanation for F06.
A05 Torque boost 2
A 0 5 T R Q B O O S T 2
This function sets the torque boost function for Motor 2. It
operates the same as F09 Torque boost 1. For details,
see the explanation for F09.
A: Alternative Motor Parameters ( Motor 2 )
A06 Electronic thermal relay 2 (select)
A07 Electronic thermal relay 2 (level)
A08 Electronic thermal relay 2 (Thermal time
constant)
A 0 6 E L C T R N O L 2
A 0 7 O L L E V E L 2
A 0 8 T I M E C N S T 2
These functions set the function of the electronic thermal
overload relay for Motor 2. They operate the same as F10
to F12 Electronic thermal overload relay 1. For details,
see the explanations for F10 to F12.
A09 Torque vector control 2
A 0 9 T R Q V E C T O R 2
This function sets the torque vector function for Motor 2.
It operates the same as F42 Torque vector control 1. For
details, see the explanation for F42.
A10 Number of motor-2 poles
A 1 0 M 2 P O L E S
This function sets the number of poles to be driven by
Motor 2. It operates the same as P01 Number of Motor 1
poles. For details, see the explanation for P01.
A11 Motor 2 (capacity)
A 1 1 M 2 C A P
This function sets the capacity of Motor 2. It operates the
same as P02 Motor 1 (Capacity). For details, see the
explanation for P02. However, the related motor data
functions change to A12 Motor 2 (Rated current), A15
Motor 2 (No-load current), A16 Motor 2 (%R1 setting), and
A17 Motor 2 (%X setting).
A12 Motor 2 (Rated current)
A 1 2 M 2 L R
This function sets the rated current for Motor 2. It
operates the same as P03 Motor 1 (Rated current). For
details, see the explanation for P03.
5-45
A13 Motor 2 (Tuning)
A 1 3 M 2 T U N 1
This function sets online tuning for Motor 2. It operates
the same as for P04 Motor 1 (Tuning). For details, see the
explanation for P04.
A14 Motor 2 (On-line tuning)
A 1 4 M 2 T U N 2
This function sets online tuning for Motor 2. It operates
the same as P05 Motor 1 (On-line tuning). For details, see
the explanation for P05.
A15 Motor 2 (No-load current)
A 1 5 M 2 I O
This function sets the no-load current for Motor 2. It
operates the same as P06 Motor 1 (No-load current). For
details, see the explanation for P06.
A16 Motor 2 (%R1 setting)
A17 Motor 2 (%X setting)
A 1 6 M 2 % R 1
A 1 7 M 2 % X
These functions set %R1 and %X for Motor 2. It operates
the same as P07 Motor 1 (%R1 setting) and P08 Motor 1
(%X setting). For details, see the explanations for P07 and
P08.
A18 Slip compensation control 2
A 1 8 S L I P C O M P 2
This function sets the amount of slip compensation for
Motor 2. It operates the same as P09 Slip compensation
control. For details, see the explanation for P09.
5-46
Notes
6-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
6. Protective Operations
LED LCD
OC1 OC DURING ACC During acceleration
OC2 OC DURING DEC During deceleration
OC3 OC AT SET SPD
Running at constant
speed
Ground fault EF GROUND FAULT
Running at constant
speed
Undervoltage LU UNDERVOLTAGE
Input phase loss Lin PHASE LOSS
Overheating of heat
sink
OH1 FIN OVERHEAT
External alarm OH2 EXT ALARM
Overheating
internally
OH3 HIGH AMB TEMP
Overheating of
braking resistor
dbH DBR OVERHEAT
Motor 1 overload OL1 MOTOR1 OL
Motor 2 overload OL2 MOTOR2 OL
Drive overload OLU INVERTER OL
Blown fuse FUS DC FUSE OPEN
Memory error Er1 MEMORY ERROR
Keypad panel
communication
error
Er2 KEYPD COM ERR
CPU error Er3 CPU ERROR
Option error Er4 OPTN COM ERR
Er5 OPTION ERROR
Operating error Er6 OPR PROCD ERR
Output wiring error Er7 TUNING ERROR
Modbus RTU error Er8 RS485 COM ERR If an error occurs while using Modbus-RTU, the protective function is activated.
Error occurred while using an optional unit.
During acceleration
During deceleration
If a CPU error occurs due to noise, etc., the protective function is activated.
Detects drive operating procedure error during drive startup. FWD or REV connected to terminal CM
when Main power is applied to drive (F02 setting 3 or 4). Stop key on keypad is pressed in terminal
operation (F02 setting 1 or 3). Detected timed alarm stop command.
If there is an open circuit or connection error in the inverter output wiring during an auto-tuning
procedure, the protective function is activated.
If a communication error or interrupt between the keypad panel and control circuit is detected, the
protective function is activated.
If the fuse in the inverter is blown out following a short-circuit or damage to the internal circuit, the
protective function is activated (for 40 Hp or more only).
If a memory error occurs, such as missing or invalid data, the protective function is activated.
If the inverter output current momentarily exceeds the overcurrent detection
level, due to an overcurrent in the motor, or a short-circuit or ground fault in the
output circuit, the protective function is activated during heavy load.
If the DC link voltage in the main circuit exceeds the overvoltage detection level
(230V series: 400V DC, 460V series: 800V DC), due to an increase in the
regenerating current from the motor, the output is shut down. However,
protection against inadvertent overvoltage (e.g., high-voltage line) may not be
provided
If the DC link voltage in the main circuit falls below the undervoltage detection level (230V series: 400V
DC, 460V series: 800V DC) due to a lowered power supply, the output is shut down. If function F14
Restart after momentary power failure was selected, an alarm is not displayed. In addition, if the supply
voltage falls to a level unable to maintain control power, an alarm may not be displayed.
If a ground fault in the inverter output circuit is detected, the protective function is activated (for 40 Hp
or more only). If a ground fault occurs in an inverter rated at 30 Hp or less, the inverter is protected by
the overcurrent protection. If protection against personal injury or property damage is required, install
a separate ground-fault protective relay or ground leakage circuit breaker.
Table 6.1.1 List of Alarms and Causes
The protective function is activated if the motor current exceeds the preset level, provided that
electronic thermal O/L relay 1 function F10 has been selected.
If the external alarm contacts on the braking unit, braking resistor, or external thermal O/L relay are
connected to the control circuit terminals (THR), the contacts will be actuated according to contact
signals.
If the temperature inside the inverter rises due to poor ventilation, etc., the protective function is
activated.
If electronic thermal O/L relay (for braking resistor) function F13 is selected, the protective function is
activated to prevent the resistor from burning due to overheating caused by frequent use of the braking
resistor.
If input power L1/R, L2/S and L3/T has any phase of the 3 phase power "OPEN" or if there is a significant
disparity between the phases, the retifying diodes or smoothing capacitors may be damaged. An Alarm
is displayed and the protective function is activated during heavy load.
If the temperature of the heat sink rises due to a cooling fan failure, or the temperature of the heatsink
is too low, the protective function is activated during heavy load.
Keypad Panel Display
Cause of Activation
OV DURING ACC
Alarm Name
If the second motor current exceeds the preset level when the operation is switched to drive the
second motor, the protective function is activated, provided that electronic thermal O/L relay 2 of
function A04 was selected.
If the output current exceeds the rated overload current, the protective function is activated to provide
thermal protection against overheating of the semiconductor elements in the inverters main circuit.
OV DURING DEC
OV AT SET SPD
Overcurrent
OU1
OU2
OU3
Overvoltage
Note: Number in fron of Alarm Code indicates multiple alarms. See page 4-15.
6.1 List of Protective Functions
In the event of an abnormality in the inverters operation, the protective function will activate immediately to trip the
inverter and display the alarm name on the LED monitor while the motor coasts to a stop. A list of the alarms with their
explanations is included in the table below, and troubleshooting charts in Section 7.
6-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
6.2 Alarm Reset
To release the trip status, enter the reset command by
pressing the RESET key on the keypad panel or sending
the appropriate signal to the RST terminal after removing
the cause of the trip. Since the reset command is an
edge operation, input a command sequence such as
OFF-ON-OFF as shown in Fig.6-2-1.
When releasing the trip status, set the operation com-
mand to OFF. If the operation command is set to ON,
inverter will start operation after resetting.
10ms or more
OFF ON OFF Reset command
Keypad panel display
Alarm output
Alarm display
Normal display
(Operable)
OFF ON OFF
Trip
Fig. 6-2-1
WARNING
If the alarm reset is activated with the operation signal ON, the inverter will restart suddenly,
which may be dangerous. To ensure safety, disable the operating signal when releasing the trip status,
as accident may result.
7-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
7. Troubleshooting
7.1 Activation of Protective Function
(1) Overcurrent
Overcurrent during
acceleration OC1
(2) Ground fault
(3) Fuse brown
Note: The ground fault protective function is provided only for drive for nominal applied motors rated at
40 HP or more.
Overcurrent during
deceleration OC2
Overcurrent running at
constant speed OC3
Are the motor connecting terminals (U, V, W) short-circuited or grounded?
Is the load excessive?
Overcurrent during
acceleration OC1
Is the acceleration time
setting too short
compared with the load?
Is the deceleration time
setting too short
compared with the load?
Has the load changed
suddenly?
Can the acceleration time
setting be prolonged?
Remove the short-circuit
and ground fault.
Reduce the load or increase
the drive capacity?
Can the torque boost
amount be reduced?
Reduce the torque boost.
Faulty drive or error due to
noise. Consult with GE Drive.
Prolong time settings.
Reduce the load or increase
the drive capacity.
Can the deceleration time
setting be prolonged?
The braking method
requires inspection.
Contact GE Drive.
Remove the grounded part.
Ground fault
EF
Is a part in the drive output circuit
(cable, motor) grounded?
Faulty drive or error due to noise.
Contact GE Drivei.
Reduce the load or increase
the drive capacity.
Possible short-circuit
within the drive.
Contact GE Drive.
Fuse brown
FUS
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
7-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Overvoltage during
acceleration OU1
(4) Overvoltage
Overvoltage during
deceleration OU2
Overvoltage running at
constant speed OU3
Reduce the supply
voltage to less than the
specified upper limit.
Faulty drive or error
due to noise. Contact
GE Drive.
Is the power supply voltage within the specified value?
Does OU activate when the load is suddenly removed?
Does the main circuit DC link voltage
exceed the protection level?
Does OU alarm activate
when acceleration is
completed?
Can the acceleration
time be prolonged?
Can the deceleration time be prolonged?
Can the amount of load inertia be reduced?
Prolong.
Reduce.
Is the braking device or DC brake function in use?
Inspect the braking method. Contact GE Drive.
Consider using a
braking system or DC
brake function.
Faulty drive control circuit
or error due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Is the main circuit DC voltage
(between P-N) higher than the
detection level specified in
Section 6.1.1?
The drive may be faulty.
Contact GE Drive.
Reset and restart
operation.
Does LU activate when
the circuit breaker or
magnetic contactor is
switched on?
Is power transformer
capacity adequate?
Replace the faulty part and
repair the connection.
Has a (momentary)
power failure occurred?
Faulty parts or loose
connection in the power
circuit?
Is there a load requiring
a large starting current
within the same power
distribution group?
Modify power distribution system to
satisfy the specified value.
Low voltage
LU
Is the power supply
voltage within the
specified value?
YES YES
YES
YES YES
YES
YES YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO NO NO
NO NO NO
NO
NO NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
(5) Low voltage
7-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(6) Overheating internally and overheating
of heat sink
(7) External thermal relay tripped
(8) Drive overload and motor overload
Overheating at
heatsink OH1
Over temperature at
inside air OH3
Check the temperature of the
heatsink using the alarm
information displayed on the
keypad panel.
Does the heatsink
temperature indicate
50C or lower?
Is the ambient
temperature -10C or
lower?
Is the load excessive? Reduce the load.
Is the cooling fan
rotating?
Replace the cooling fan.
Is the cooling air
passage blocked?
Is the ambient
temperature within the
specification?
Arrange peripheral
conditions to meet the
specification.
Remove obstacles.
YES
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
External thermal relay tripped
OH2
Is PTC MODE
H26 enabled?
Is PTC operating?
Incorrect motor load or
inadequate cooling.
Check the motor side.
Set to correct value.
Change to regular
external circuit.
Is PTC level H27 set
correctly?
Is the external circuit
(including constants
regular?
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Is data input to the control
terminals THR-X1 to X9?
Are alarm signals from
external equipment input to
the terminals and the CM?
Connect the alarm
signal contact.
Is the alarm function of
the external equipment
operating correctly?
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Remove the cause
of alarm function
activation.
Drive overload
OLU
Motor overload
OL1, OL2
Do the characteristics of the
electronic thermal O/L relay
and motor overload match?
Connect a thermal O/L
relay externally.
Is the electronic thermal O/L
relay setting correct?
Set to the correct level.
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Is the load excessive?
Reduce the load or
increase drive capacity.
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
IIncrease ambient
temperature
YES
NO
7-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(9) Memory error Er1,
Keypad panel communication error Er2,
CPU error Er3
(10) Output wiring error
(11) Input Phase/Loss
Remedy faulty parts.
Er1, 2, 3 indicated. Abnormal
display or indication goes out.
Are there loose screws on
the terminal block?
Turn the power off then on
again after the CHARGE lamp
(CRG) goes off.
Is data displayed on the
LED monitor correctly?
Drive is normal.
Continue operation.
Are the connectors, plugs,
and ICs inserted correctly?
Is there noise generating
source nearby?
Drive may be faulty.
Contact GE Drive.
Output wiring error
Er7
Did the error occur
during tuning?
Are the braking unit and
braking resistor connected
incorrectly?
Faulty drive or error due
to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Connect
correctly or
replace the
cable.
Input phase loss
Lin
Are all main circuit power supply
terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T
connected to the power supply?
Is the U, V, W terminal wiring not
connected or is there an open
circuit?
The keypad panel
connector is loose.
Connect all three
phases.
Connect
correctly or
replace the
cable.
Secure the
connector.
Disable the
connection.
Is connection between
control terminals FWD,
REV - CM enabled?
Tighten the screws on
the terminal block.
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Is there a significant
imbalance voltage
between phases?
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
7-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Check for problems (low
voltage, an open phase,
a loose connection, poor
contact) and remedy
accordingly.
7.2 Abnormal Motor Rotation
(1) If motor does not rotate
The motor does not rotate if the following commands are issued.
An operation command is issued while the coast-to-stop or DC braking command is output.
A reverse operation command is issued with the H08 Rev. phase sequence lock value set ot 1.
Motor does not rotate.
Charge lamp (CRG)
lights and LCD moniotr
lights up?
Are the circuit breaker and
magnetic contactor on the power
supply side switched on?
Turn on.
Are the voltages at the
power terminals (R/L1,
S/L2, T/L3) normal?
Is the LCD monitor
displaying an alarm
mode screen?
Is a jumper or DC reactor
connected between terminals
P1 and P(+)?
Connect.
Drive may be faulty.
Contact GE Drive.
Is input method from
keypad panel or control
terminal?
Remove the cause of alarm
function activation and reset
the alarm, then run the motor.
If no error is detected,
continue operation.
Was the forward or
reverse operation
command given?
Is external wiring between
control circuit terminals FWD,
REV - CM connected correctly?
Correct the wiring error.
Replace the faulty
switch or relay.
Has the frequency
been set?
Press the UP
key and set the
frequency.
Does the motor run if
FWD or REV is pressed?
Does the motor start
when the key UP
is pressed?
Are the frequency limiter
(High) and the frequency
setting lower than the
starting frequency?
Is the external wiring between
control terminals 13, 12, 11,
and C1 or between X1-X9 and
CM for the multi-step
frequency selection connected
correctly?
Replace the faulty frequency
setting POT, (VR), signal converter,
switch, or relay contacts as
required.
Are the drive output
terminals (U, V, W) provided
with the proper voltage?
Set the frequency
correctly.
Faulty motor.
Are the cables to the
motor connected
correctly?
Correct the wiring error.
The load is excessive, resulting in
motor lock. Reduce the load and
check that the brake is released
(if a mechanical brake is used.)
Is the torque boost
set correctly?
Excessive load?
Raise the torque boost.
Note: Monitor the operation command or
frequency setting values, etc., on
the LED or LCD monitor after
selecting the respective functions.
Drive may be faulty.
Contact GE Fuji.
Keyad
panel
Control
terminals
NO
YES
YES YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
7-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(2) If the motor rotates but the speed does not change
In the following cases, changing the motor speed is also restricted.
Signals are input from control terminals both 12 and C1 when F01 Frequency command 1 and C30
Frequency command 2 are set to 3, and there is no significant change in the added value.
The load is excessive, and the torque limiting and current limiting functions are activated.
The motor rotates but the
speed does not change.
YES
Change the setting.
Is the maximum
frequency setting too
low?
Is the higher or lower
frequency limiter
activating?
Is the timer timing
too long?
Which frequency setting
methods used: keypad panel,
analog signal, multi-step
frequency, or UP/DOWN
control? Is the pattern
operation activated?
Is the pattern operation
competed?
Are all acceleration and
deceleration times
identical?
Are the external connections
between X1-X9 and CM
correct?
Increase the setting.
Set the frequency.
Does the speed change when
the UP or DOWN is pressed?
Can the frequency
setting signal (0 to 10 V,
4 to 20 mA) be changed?
Correct the connection
error.
Replace the faulty frequency
setting POT (VR) or signal
converter as required.
YES
YES
Pattern
operation
Keypad panel
operation
Analog signal
Multi-step frequency
UP/DOWN
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO NO
NO
YES
YES
Change the frequency
setting.
Are the external
connections between
control terminals 13, 12,
11 and C1 correct?
Are the frequencies for
each multi-step
frequency different?
Is the acceleration or
deceleration time set
too long?
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Change the time setting to
conform to load values.
YES
NO
7-7
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
(3) If the motor stalls during acceleration
The motor stalls during
acceleration.
YES
NO
Is the acceleration time
too short?
Prolong the time.
Is the inertia moment of the
motor or the load excessive?
Is a special motor used? Contact GE Drive.
Use a thicker cable between
the drive and the motor or
shorten the cable length.
Has the motor terminal
voltage dropped?
Reduce the inertia moment
of the load or increase the
drive capacity.
Is the torque of the load
excessive?
Reduce the torque of the
load or increase the drive
capacity.
Is the torque boost
set correctly?
Faulty drive or error due
to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Increase the torque boost.
The motor generates
abnormal heat.
Is the torque boost
excessive?
Reduce the torque boost.
Has the motor been
operating continuously at a
very low speed?
Use a motor exclusive
to the drive.
Is the load excessive?
Reduce the load or increase
motor capacity.
Is the drive output voltage.
Terminals (U, V, W)
balanced?
Faulty motor.
Faulty drive or error
due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drive.
Note: Motor overheating following a
higher frequency setting is likely the
result of the current wave form.
Contact GE Drives.
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
7-8
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Notes
8-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
8. Maintenance and Inspection
Proceed with daily inspection and periodic inspection to prevent malfunction and ensure long-term reliability. Some tips
regarding things to look for during these inspections are listed below.
8.1 Daily Inspections
During operation, a visual inspection for abnormal operation can take place externally without removing the covers.
The inspection should cover the following areas:
(1) The performance, according to standard specifications,
is as expected.
(2) The environment conforms to standard specifications.
(3) The keypad panel display is normal.
(4) There are no abnormal sounds, vibrations, or odors.
(5) There are no indications of overheating or discoloration.
8.2 Periodic Inspections
Periodic inspections should be made after stopping operations, cutting off the power source, and removing the surface
cover.
Note that after turning off the power, the smoothing capacitors in the DC section of the main circuit take time to dis-
charge. To prevent electric shock, confirm with a multimeter that the voltage has dropped below the safety value (25 V
DC or below) after the charge lamp (CRG) goes off.
WARNING
Start the inspection at least five minutes after turning off the power supply for inverters rated at 30
Hp or less. Wait at least ten minutes for inverters rated at 40 Hp or more. Check that the charge
lamp (CRG) went off and that the voltage is 25V DC or less between terminals P(+) and N(-). Electric
shock may result.
Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance and component replacement operations.
Remove metal jewelry such as watches and rings, and always use insulated tools.
Never modify the drive. Electric shock or injury may result.
8-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Environment
Voltage
Keypad panel
Structure
(frame or cover)
Common
Conductors
and wiring
Terminal block
Smoothing
capacitor
Resistor
Transformer
and reactor
Magnetic
conductor
and relay
Control PC
board and
connector
Cooling fan
Ventilation
1) Check the ambient temperature, humidity,
vibration, atmosphere (dust, gas, oil mist,
water drops).
2) Is the area surrounding the equipment free of
foreign objects.
Are the voltages in the main circuit and the
control circuit normal?
1) Is the display hard to read?
2) Are the characters complete?
1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration?
2) Are nuts or bolts loose?
3) Is there deformation or damage?
4) Is there discoloration as a result of overheat-
ing?
5) Are there stains or dust?
1) Are there loose or missing nuts or bolts?
2) Are there deformations, cracks, damage, or
discoloration due to overheating or deteriora-
tion in the equipment and insulation?
3) Are there stains and dust?
1) Is there discoloration or distortion of a
conductor due to overheating?
2) Are there cracks, crazing or discoloration of
the cable sheath?
Is there damage?
1) Is there electrolyte leakage, discoloration,
crazing, or swelling in the case?
2) Is the safety valve not protruding, or are
valves protruding too far?
3) Measure the capacitance if necessary.
1) Is there any unusual odor or damage to the
insulation by overheating?
2) Is there an open circuit?
Is there abnormal buzzing or an unpleasant
smell?
1) Is there a rattling noise during operation?
2) Are the contacts rough?
1) Are there any loose screws or connectors?
2) Is there an unusual odor or discoloration?
3) Are there cracks, damage, deformation, or
excessive rust?
4) Is there electrolyte leakage or damage to the
capacitor?
1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration?
2) Are nuts or bolts loose?
3) Is there discoloration due to overheating?
Is there foreign matter on the heat sink or intake
and exhaust ports?
1) Conduct a visual inspection and use
appropriate meters.
2) Visual inspection
Measure with a multi-meter.
1) Visual inspection
2) Visual inspection
1) Visual and aural inspection
2) Tighten
3), 4), 5) Visual inspection
1) Tighten.
2), 3) Visual inspection
1), 2) Visual inspection
Visual inspection
1), 2) Visual inspection
3) *Estimate life expectancy from
maintenance information and from
measurements using capacitance
measuring equipment.
1) Visual and olfactory inspection
2) Conduct a visual inspection or use a
multi-meter by removing the connection
on one side.
Aural, olfactory, and visual inspection
1) Aural inspection.
2) Visual inpection.
1) Aural inspection.
2) Visual and olfactory inspection
3) Visual inspection
4) *Estimate life expectancy by visual
inspection and maintenace information
1) Aural and visual inspection. Turn
manually (confirm the poewr is off).
2) Tighten.
3) Visual inspection
4) *Estimate life expectancy by mainte-
nance information
Visual inspection
1) Results comply with all
standard specifications.
2) The area is clear.
Results comply with all
standard specifications.
1), 2) The display can be
easily read and characters
are normal.
1), 2), 3), 4), 5)
No abnormalities
1), 2), 3) No abnormalities
Note: Discolorationof the
bus bar does not
indicate a problem.
1), 2) No abnormalities
No abnormalities
1), 2) No abnormalities
3) Capacitance is within
85% of initial value
1) No abnormalities
2) Less than about 10%
of the indicated
resistance value
No abnormalities
1), 2) No abnormalities
1), 2), 3), 4)
No abnormalities
1) The fan must rotate
smoothly.
2), 3) No abnormalities
No abnormalities
Area to Check Items to Check How to inspect Evaluation Criteria
See additional notes on following page.
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

S
y
s
t
e
m
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

C
i
r
c
u
i
t
M
a
i
n

C
i
r
c
u
i
t
8-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Note: If equipment is stained, wipe with a clean cloth. Use a vacuum to remove dust. *Estimate of life expectancy based
on maintenance information.
The maintenance information is stored in the drive keypad panel. It indicates the electrostatic capacitance of the main
circuit capacitors and the life expectancy of the electrolytic capacitors on the control PC board and the cooling fans. Use
this data as the basis to estimate the life expectancy of parts.
1) Determining the capacitance of the main circuit capacitors
This drive is equipped with a function to automatically indicate the capacitance of the capacitors installed in the main
circuit when powering up the drive after disconnecting the power according to the prescribed conditions.
The initial capacitance values are set in the drive when shipped from the factory, and the decrease ratio (%) to those
values can be displayed.
Use this function as follows:
(1) Remove any option boards from the inverter. Disconnect the DC bus connections to the main circuit [Terminals
P(+) and N(-)] from the braking unit or other inverters, if connected. The power factor correcting reactor (DC
reactor) does not need be disconnected.
A power supply introduced to the auxiliary input [Terminals R0, T0] that provides control power should
be isolated.
(2) Disable all the digital inputs (FWD, REV, X1-X9) on the control terminals. Also disconnect RS485 serial
communication, if used.
Turn on the main power supply. Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and that the inverter is not operating.
(There is no problem if the OH2 External thermal relay tripped function is activated by the digital input terminal.)
(3) Turn the main power off.
(4) Turn on the main power again after verifying that the charge lamp is completely off.
(5) Open the maintenance information on the keypad panel and confirm the capacitance values of the
built-in capacitors.
2) Life expectancy of the PC control board
The actual capacitance of a capacitor is not measured in this case. However, the integrated operating hours for the
control power supply, multiplied by the life expectancy coefficient as defined by the temperature inside the inverter,
will be displayed. Hence, the hours displayed may not agree with the actual operating hours, depending on the
operational environment.
Since the integrated hours are counted in unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.
3) Life expectancy of cooling fan
The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are displayed. Since the integrated hours are counted in unit hours,
power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.
The displayed value should be considered a rough estimate because the actual life of a cooling fan is influenced
significantly by the temperature.
Table 8..-2 Rough estimate of life expectancy using maintenance information
Parts Recommended Level
Capacitor in main circuit 85% or less of the initial value
Electrolytic capacitor on control PC board 61,000 hours
Cooling fan 40,000 hours (5 Hp or less), 25,000 hours (Over 7.5 Hp)*
* Estimated life expectancy of a ventilation-fan at inverter ambient temperature of 40C
8-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
8.3 Main Circuit Measurements
The indicated values depend on the type of meter, because the harmonic component is included in the voltage and
current of the main circuit power (input) and the output (motor) side of the inverter. If measuring with a meter for commer-
cial power frequency use, use the meters shown in Table 8.3.1.
The power factor cannot be measured using power factor meters currently available on the market, which measure the
phase difference between voltage and current. If power factors must be measured, measure the power, voltage, and
current on the input side and output side, then calculate the power factor using the following formula:
Table 8.3-. Meters for Measuring Main Circuit
Item Input (power supply) Side Output (motor) Side DC Link Circuit
Voltage
P(+) - N(-)
Voltage Current Voltage Current
Meter name Ammeter Voltmeter Powermeter Ammeter Voltmeter Powermeter DC Voltmeter
AR,S,T VR,S,T WR,S,T AU,V,W VU,V,W WU,V,W V
Meter type Moving iron Rectifier or Digital Moving iron Rectifier Digital power Moving coil type
type moving-iron power meter type type meter
type
Symbol
Note: If the output voltage is measured with a rectifier type meter, an error may occur. Use a digital AC power meter to
ensure accuracy.
Power factor =
Power [W]
x 100 [%]
3 x Voltage [V] x Current [A]
8-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
8.4 Insulation Test
Avoid megger testing on an drive since an insulation test was completed at the factory. If a megger test must be com-
pleted, proceed as described below. Incorrect testing methods may result in product damage.
If the specifications for the dielectric strength test are not followed, the drive may be damaged.
(1) Megger test for the main circuit
1. Use a 500V DC megger and isolate the main power before starting measurement.
2. If the test voltage is connected to the control circuit, remove all connection cables to the control circuit.
3. Connect the main circuit terminals using common cables, as shown in Fig. 8-4-1.
4. Perform the megger test only between the common cables connected to the main circuit and ground
(Terminal ).
5. A megger indicating 5M Ohm or more is normal. (This is the value measured with only the drive connected.)
(2) Insulation test in the control circuit
Megger and dielectric strength tests are not performed on the control circuit. Use a resistance multimeter with a high
resistance range to check the control circuit.
1. Remove all external cables from the control circuit terminals.
2. Conduct a continuity test between grounds. A result of 1M Ohm or more is normal.
(3) Exterior main circuit and sequence control circuit
Remove all cables from drive terminals to ensure that test voltage is not applied to the drive.
8.5 Replacement Parts
The life expectancy of a part depends on the type of part, the environment, and operating conditions. Parts should be
replaced as shown in Table 8-5-1.
Table 8-5-1 Part replacement
Part name
Standard period for
replacement
Comments
Cooling fan 3 years Exchange for a new part
Smoothing capacitor 5 years Exchange for a new part (determine after checking
Electrlytic capacitor on the PC board 7 years Exchange for a new PC board (determine after checking)
Fuse 10 years Exchange for a new part
Other parts Determine after checking
8-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Notes:
9-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
9. Warranty Parts and Service
The purpose of this section is to provide specific
instructions to the user of the standard drive referenced
in this book regarding warranty administration and how
to obtain assistance on both in-warranty and out-of-
warranty equipment.
For all warranty procedures, refer to section 10 of this
instruction manual to identify the part or assembly.
If assistance is required to determine warranty status,
identify defective parts, or obtain the name of your local
distributor, call:
GE Consumer & Industrial
Product Service Engineering
41 Woodford Avenue
Plainville, CT USA
Phone: 1 800 533 5885 (United States)
+ 1 540 378 3280 (International)
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
(+ indicates the international access code required
when calling from outside of the USA.)
WARRANTY COVERAGE
The warranty covers all major parts of the drive such as
the main printed circuit boards, transistor modules, etc.
The warranty does not cover replacement of fuses or of
the entire drive.
Warranty period is 12 months after installation or 18
months after shipment from the Company, whichever
occurs first.
However, the guarantee will not apply in the following
cases, even if the guarantee term has not expired:
1. Damage was caused by incorrect use or inappropri-
ate repair or modification.
2. The product was used in an environment outside the
standard specified range.
3. Damage was caused by dropping the product after
purchase or occurred during transportation.
4. Damage was caused by an earthquake, fire, flooding,
lightning, abnormal voltage, or other natural calami-
ties and secondary disasters.
Before calling the number at left to determine warranty
status, the drive serial number will be required. This is
located on the drive nameplate. If the drive is still under
warranty, further information will be required per the In-
Warranty Failure Checklist shown on page 9-2 of this
instruction manual.
OUT-OF WARRANTY PROCEDURES
When the defective part has been identified, contact your
local authorized GE standard drives distributor to order
replacement parts.
MOTORS
Motor repairs on General Electric motors are generally
handled by GE Authorized Electric Motor Servicenters or
GE Apparatus Service Shops. For specific instructions on
your motor, call the distributor from which it was pur-
chased and be prepared to furnish complete nameplate
data.
9-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
IN-WARRANTY FAILURE CHECKLIST
To assist with warranty troubleshooting, the following information is required. This data is needed to evaluate the
cause in an effort to eliminate any further failures.
Model No.: ______________________________________________________________________
Serial No.: ______________________________________________________________________
Start-Up Date: __________________________________________________________________
Failure Date: ____________________________________________________________________
Status When Failure Occurred (check one):
Power-Up__________ Running ___________ Accel ___________ Decel _________
Explanation of Failure ____________________________________________________________
Application Information (check Yes or No)
Input Transformer: Yes ___________No _______________
If Yes: KVA ___________________________________
L1 Volts ___________ L2 Volts ________ L3 Volts ______________
Power Factor Correction Capacitors: Yes __________No _______________
If Yes: Microfarrad ______________________________
Other Equipment on Same Power Yes __________No _______________
If Yes, what?
Line Reactor on Input Yes __________No _______________
Input Starter Yes __________No _______________
Output Starter Yes __________No _______________
Motor Overloads Yes __________No _______________
Control Terminals Used (circle if used)
Function Codes Different From Factory Settings
Function Code Setting Function Code Setting
Failure Message (see Section 4)
Latest Fault _______________ Previous Faults: No Message _____________
Hz ______________________ 1. _____________________________
A _______________________ 2. _____________________________
V _______________________ 3. _____________________________
After all of the Checklist information is acquired, contact the following number for assistance: (800) 533-5885
When returning failed parts, reference the C_ _ _ _ # on the shipping documents that came with the replacement parts and ship
failed parts to: GE Drives.
(Marked C _ _ _ _ #)
3
0
C
3
0
B
Y
5
C
Y
4
Y
2
1
1
1
2
1
3
V
2
C
M
C
M
F
W
D
R
E
V
P
2
4
P
2
4
D
X
D
X
S
D
3
0
A
Y
5
A
C
M
Y
Y
3
Y
1
C
1
F
M
A
F
M
P
P
L
C
X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
X
5
X
6
X
7
X
8
X
9
10-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
10. AF-300 P11 Replacement Parts
Catalog No. Rating Drive HP & Quantity per drive
1/4 1/2 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
AF-300 P11 230VAC, 30HP and Below
Main Control Card
G11CPCBB1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Gate Driver & Power Supply Card
G11PPCBG2002 1
G11PPCBG2004 1
G11PPCBG2008 1
G11PPCBG2015 1
G11PPCBG2022 1
G11PPCBG2037 1
G11PPCBG2055 1 1
G11PPCBG2075 1
G11PPCBG2110 1
G11PPCBG2150 1
G11PPCBG2185 1
KEYPAD PANEL (Only one type per drive)
TPAG11S NEMA Type1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
TPAG11S4 NEMA Type4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CAPACITOR UNIT * * *
G11CAP01 PCB 1
G11CAP02 PCB 1
G11CAP03 PCB 1
G11CAP09 2700Fx1 1 1 2
G11CAP10 3900Fx1 1 2
G11CAP11 4700Fx2 2
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
FAN
G11FAN01 1 1 1
G11FAN02 1 1 1 2 2 2
POWER MODULE * * *
PS11046 30A 600V 1 1
PS11047 50A 600V 1
6MBP75RS060 75A 600V 1 1
6MBP100RS060 100A 600V 1
6MBP150RS060 150A 600V 1 1
6MBP200RS060 200A 600V 1
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
RECTIFIER MODULE * * * * * *
PVC758 75A 800V 1 1 1
CLK120AA80 120A 800V 1 1
CLK180AA80 180A 800V 1
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
* * * * * *
30W66 30W 6.6WJ 1 1 1
80W25 80W 2.5WJ 1 1 1
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
FRONT COVER
G11UPCG008P 1 1 1
G11UPCG040P 1 1 1
G11UPCG075P 1 1 1
G11UPCG220P 1 1 1
CHARGE RESISTOR
10-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Catalog No. Rating Drive HP & Quantity per drive
40 50 60 75 100 125 150
AF-300 P11 230VAC, 40HP and Above
Main Control Card
EP4113B1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Gate Driver & Power Supply Card
EP3956C1 1 1
EP3956C2 1
EP3956C3 1 1
EP3957C1 1
EP3957C2 1
KEYPAD PANEL
TPAG11S4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DC CAPACITOR
LNT2G302MSMAFF 400V 3000F 4 4
HCGHA2G362N3K 400V 3600F 4
HCGHA2G452NE3K 400V 4500F 4
HCGHA2G592N3K 400V 5900f 4 5 6
FAN
FBA09A24H1B0 1 1 1 2 2 2 4
(Standard)
4715PS22TB30 2 2
2750MTP15 2 2 3 4
6250MG1 2
(For NEMA12 Heatsink)
UHS4556MLOT1 2 2
2750MTP15OT1 2 2 3 4
U6250MKG1LTPOT1 2
IGBT MODULE
2MBi300NB060 3 3
CM400DU12H206 3
2MBi300NB06001 6 6 9 12
RECTIFIER MODULE
PD1008AC 3 3 6 6 9 9 9
CHARGE RESISTOR
HF5C5504 80W 7.5ohm 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
DC CONTACTOR
FC3UL AC220VAUX2B 1 1
FC1UL AC220VAUX2B 2 2 2
FC4UL AC220VAUX2B 2
SC7NUL AC200-240V 1
DC FUSE
CR2L260UL 1 1 1
CR2L400UL 1 1
A50P6004 1 1
INPUT MODULE CARD
EP3985C1 1 1 1 1 1
EP3985C3 1 1
10. AF-300 P11 Replacement Parts (continued)
10-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Catalog No. Rating Drive HP & Quantity per drive
1/2 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
AF-300 P11 460VAC, 30HP and Below
Main Control Card
G11CPCBB1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Gate Driver & Power Supply Card
G11PPCBG4004 1
G11PPCBG4008 1
G11PPCBG4015 1
G11PPCBG4022 1
G11PPCBG4037 1
G11PPCBG4055 1 1
G11PPCBG4075 1
G11PPCBG4110 1
G11PPCBG4150 1
G11PPCBG4185 1
KEYPAD PANEL (Only one type per drive)
TPAG11S NEMA Type1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
TPAG11S4 NEMA Type4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CAPACITOR UNIT * *
G11CAP04 PCB 1
G11CAP05 PCB 1
G11CAP06 PCB 1
G11CAP07 1500Fx2 2 2
G11CAP08 2000Fx2 2
G11CAP09 2700Fx2 2
G11CAP10 3900Fx2 2
G11CAP11 4700Fx2 2
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
FAN
G11FAN01 1 1 1
G11FAN02 1 1 1 2 2 2
POWER MODULE * *
PS12046 15A 1200V 1 1
PS12047 25A 1200V 1
6MBP50RS120 50A 1200V 1 1 1
6MBP75RS120 75A 1200V 1 1
6MBP100RS120 100A 1200V 1
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
RECTIFIER MODULE * * * * *
PVC7516 75A 1600V 1 1 1
CLK70AA160 70A 1600V 1 1
CLK100AA160 100A 1600V 1
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
CHARGE RESISTOR * * * * *
30W200 30W 20WJ 1 1 1
80W100 80W 10WJ 1 1 1
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
FRONT COVER
G11UPCG008P 1 1
G11UPCG040P 1 1 1
G11UPCG075P 1 1 1
G11UPCG220P 1 1 1
10. AF-300 P11 Replacement Parts (continued)
10-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
10. AF-300 P11 Replacement Parts (continued)
Catalog No. Rating Drive HP & Quantity per drive
40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
AF-300 P11 460VAC, 40HP and Above
Main Control Card
EP4113B1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Gate Driver & Power Supply Card
EP3959C1 1 1
EP3959C2 1
EP3959C3 1 1
EP3959C4 1
EP3959C5 1 1
EP3957C3 1 1
EP3957C4 1 1 1
EP3957C5 1 1 1 1
GATE DRIVE AMPLIFIER CARD
EP4142 3 3 3 3
KEYPAD PANEL
TPAG11S4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DC CAPACITOR
LNT2G302MSMAFF 400V 3000F 4 4
HCGHA2G362N3K 400V 3600F 4
HCGHA2G452NE3K 400V 4500F 4 6
HCGHA2G592N3K 400V 5900f 4 4 6 8 12
HCGHA2G742N3K 400V 7400F 8 12 12
HCGHA2G932N3KG 400V 9300F 20 20 26 26
FAN UNIT
FBA09A24H1B0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4
MRS18-DUL 3 3 4 4
THB1-UHS4556M 4 4
(Standard)
4715PS22TB30 2 2
2750MTP15 2 2 3 3
6250MG1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4
(For NEMA12 Heatsink)
UHS4556MLOT1 2 2
2750MTP15OT1 2 2 3 3
U6250MKG1LTPOT1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4
IGBT MODULE
2MBi150PC14002 3 3
CM200DU24H203 3
2MBi300P14002 3 3
CM200DU24H202 6
2MBi300P14003 6 6 9 9 12 12 12 18 18 24 24

PD6016A 3 3 3 12 12
PD10016A 3 3 6 6 6 12 12 12 24 24 30 30
RECTIFIER MODULE
10-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
10. AF-300 P11 Replacement Parts (continued)
Catalog No. Rating Drive HP & Quantity per drive
40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
AF-300 P11 460VAC, 40HP and Above
IGBT MODULE
2MBi150PC14002 3 3
CM200DU24H203 3
2MBi300p14002 3 3
CM200DU24H202 6
2MBi300P14003 6 6 9 9 12 12 12 18 18 24 24
RECTIFIER MODULE
PD6016A 3 3 3 12 12
PD10016A 3 3 6 6 6 12 12 12 24 24 30 30
CHARGE RESISTOR
HF5C5504 80W 7.5ohm 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4
GRZG400 2 2 2 2
DC CONTACTOR
FC1UL AC220VAUX2B 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
FC4UL AC220VAUX2B 2 2
SC7NUL AC200-240V 1
SC8NUL AC200-240V 1 1
SCN8 AC200-240V 2 2 2 2
DC FUSE
CR6L150UL 600V 150A 1 1 1
CR6L200UL 600V 200A 1
CR6L300UL 600V 300A 1 1
A70Q4004 1 1
A70Q5004 1
A70Q6004 1 1
A70QS8004 1 1
A70P16004TA 1 1
A70P20004 1 1
TRANSFORMER
HF5C55025512VA 1 1
HF5C550312524VA 1 1 1 1
HF5B661330016VA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HF5B395170020VA 1 1 1 1
INPUT MODULE CARD
EP3985C2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EP3985C4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Notes:
11-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
11. Specifications
11.1 Standard Specifications
T
h
r
e
e
-
p
h
a
s
e

2
3
0
V

s
e
r
i
e
s
F
2
5
F
5
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
5
0
0
7
0
1
0
0
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
5
1
0
0
1
2
5

N
o
m
i
n
a
l

2
3
0
V

s
y
s
t
e
m

p
p
l
i
e
d

m
o
t
o
r




H
P

1
/
4
1
/
2
1
2
3
5
7
.
5
1
0
1
5
2
0
2
5
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
5
1
0
0
1
2
5

O
u
t
p
u
t

R
a
t
e
d

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

*
1
)
k
V
A

0
.
5
9
1
.
1
1
.
9
3
.
1
4
.
3
6
.
7
9
.
9
1
3
1
8
2
3
2
9
3
4
4
5
5
7
7
1
8
5
1
1
2
1
3
7

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

R
a
t
e
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

*
2
)

V


3
-
p
h
a
s
e
,


2
0
0
V

/
5
0
H
z

,








2
0
0
V

,
2
2
0
V

,
2
3
0
V

/
6
0
H
z



R
a
t
e
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

*
3
)
A

1
.
5
3
.
0
5
.
0
8
.
0
1
1

1
7

2
5

3
3
4
6
5
9
7
4
8
7

1
1
5
1
4
5
1
8
0
2
1
5
2
8
3
3
4
6

O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d

C
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

1
5
0
%



o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

1
m
i
n


,


2
0
0
%



o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

0
.
5
s




1
5
0
%



o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

1
m
i
n


,



1
8
0
%



o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

0
.
5
s



R
a
t
e
d

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
H
z


5
0
,

6
0
H
z


I
n
p
u
t


P
h
a
s
e
s
,

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
,

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

3
-
p
h
a
s
e
,


2
0
0

t
o

2
3
0
V


,


5
0
/
6
0
H
z




3
-
p
h
a
s
e
,

2
0
0

t
o

2
2
0
V


/
5
0
H
z


,


2
0
0

t
o

2
3
0
V


/
6
0
H
z

r
a
t
i
n
g
s
















*

2
2
0

t
o

2
3
0
V


/
5
0
H
z



*
4
)
,

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

/

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

v
a
r
i
a
t
i
o
n
s





-
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

:

+
1
0

t
o

-
1
5
%


(

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

u
n
b
a
l
a
n
c
e

*
5
)

:

2
%

o
r

l
e
s
s


)

-
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

:
+
5

t
o

-
5
%



M
o
m
e
n
t
a
r
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

d
i
p


W
h
e
n

t
h
e

i
n
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

i
s

1
6
5
V



o
r

m
o
r
e
,

t
h
e

i
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

c
a
n

b
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
e
d

c
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s
l
y
.


c
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

*
6
)

W
h
e
n

t
h
e

i
n
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

d
r
o
p
s

b
e
l
o
w

1
6
5
V




f
r
o
m

r
a
t
e
d

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
,

t
h
e

i
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

c
a
n

b
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
e
d

f
o
r

1
5
m
s


.

(
w
i
t
h
i
n

8
5
%



l
o
a
d

o
f

n
o
m
i
n
a
l

a
p
p
l
i
e
d

m
o
t
o
r
s
)


T
h
e

s
m
o
o
t
h

r
e
c
o
v
e
r
y

m
e
t
h
o
d

i
s

s
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e
.


O
u
t
p
u
t

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

F
r
e
q
.

5
0

t
o

4
0
0
H
z



*
1
1
)

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y


B
a
s
e

F
r
e
q
.

2
5

t
o

4
0
0
H
z



*
1
1
)

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

F
r
e
q
.

0
.
1

t
o

6
0
H
z




,


C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

t
i
m
e

:

0
.
0

t
o

1
0
.
0
s



C
a
r
r
i
e
r

F
r
e
q
.

*
8
)

0
.
7
5


t
o

1
5
k
H
z



T
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

c
a
r
r
i
e
r

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

c
h
a
n
g
e
s

d
e
p
e
n
d

o
n

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

o
u
t
p
u
t

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
.

0
.
7
5

t
o

1
0
k
H
z


A
c
c
u
r
a
c
y

(
S
t
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
)

-
A
n
a
l
o
g

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

0
.
2
%

o
f

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

(
a
t

2
5

1
0

d
e
g
r
e
e
s

C
)

-
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

0
.
0
1
%

o
f

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

(
a
t

-
1
0

t
o

+
5
0

d
e
g
r
e
e
s

C
)

S
e
t
t
i
n
g

r
e
s
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

-
A
n
a
l
o
g

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

1
/
3
0
0
0

o
f

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y


e
x
.
)

0
.
0
2
H
z


a
t

6
0
H
z


,
0
.
1
5
H
z


a
t

4
0
0
H
z


-
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

0
.
0
1
H
z



a
t

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

o
f

u
p

t
o

9
9
.
9
9
H
z



(
0
.
1
H
z



a
t

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

o
f

1
0
0
H
z



a
n
d

a
b
o
v
e
)

-
L
i
n
k

s
e
t
t
i
n
g
:

T
w
o

m
e
t
h
o
d
s

a
r
e

s
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

V
o
l
t
/
F
r
e
q

C
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c

8
0

t
o

2
4
0
V

(
w
i
t
h

A
V
R

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

a
t

b
a
s
e

a
n
d

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
,

a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

T
o
r
q
u
e

b
o
o
s
t
C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

t
o
r
u
q
u
e

l
o
a
d

V
a
r
i
a
b
l
e

t
o
r
q
u
e

l
o
a
d

A
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c

(
s
e
t
t
i
n
g

c
o
d
e
)
:
0
.
0
-

M
a
n
u
a
l






(
s
e
t
t
i
n
g

c
o
d
e
)
:
2
.
0

t
o

2
0
.
0
0
.
1

t
o

1
.
9


*
9
)

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e


2
0
0
%



(
w
i
t
h

D
y
n
a
m
i
c

t
o
r
q
u
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d
)

1
8
0
%



(
w
i
t
h

D
y
n
a
m
i
c

t
o
r
q
u
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d
)


B
r
a
k
i
n
g

B
r
a
k
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e

1
5
0
%
1
0
0
%
2
0
%




*
1
0
)
1
5

t
o

1
0
%




*
1
0
)
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

T
i
m
e



s

1
0

5
5

N
o

l
i
m
i
t















D
u
t
y

c
y
c
l
e



%

1
0

5

3

5

3

2

3

2


N
o

l
i
m
i
t

B
r
a
k
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e
1
5
0
%
1
0
0
%
O
p
t
i
o
n
s

T
i
m
e


s

9
0
4
5
4
5
4
5
3
0
2
0
1
0
8
1
0

D
u
t
y

c
y
c
l
e



%

3
7
2
2
1
8
1
0
7
5
5
5
1
0

D
C

i
n
j
e
c
t
i
o
n

b
r
a
k
i
n
g

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

:

0
.
1

t
o

6
0
.
0
H
z


,



B
r
a
k
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

:

0
.
0

t
o

3
0
.
0
s


,


B
r
a
k
i
n
g

l
e
v
e
l

:

0

t
o

1
0
0
%



o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
,

T
y
p
e
4
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
,

T
y
p
e
1
2













O
p
e
n
,

O
p
e
n

w
i
t
h

N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e

1
2

H
e
a
t
s
i
n
k
,

N
E
M
A

1

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

m
e
t
h
o
d
N
a
t
u
r
a
l

F
a
n

c
o
o
l
i
n
g

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s


-
U
L
/
c
U
L



N
O
T
E
S
*
1
)

I
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

o
u
t
p
u
t

c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

[
k
V
A
]

a
t

2
3
0
V
.
*
2
)

O
u
t
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

i
s

p
r
o
p
o
r
t
i
o
n
a
l

t
o

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

a
n
d

c
a
n
'
t

e
x
c
e
e
d

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
.
*
3
)

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

d
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

m
a
y

b
e

r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d

i
n

c
a
s
e

o
f

l
o
w

i
m
p
e
d
a
n
c
e

l
o
a
d

s
u
c
h

a
s

h
i
g
h

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

m
o
t
o
r
.
*
4
)

2
2
0

t
o

2
3
0
V
/
5
0
H
z

:

O
r
d
e
r

i
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
l
y


*
5
)

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

t
o

t
h
e

I
E
C

6
1
8
0
0
-
3
(

5
.
2
.
3

)
(
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
[
V
]

-

M
i
n
i
m
u
m

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
[
V
]

)
3
-
p
h
a
s
e

a
v
e
r
a
g
i
n
g

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
[
V
]


*
6
)

I
n
p
u
t

p
o
w
e
r

:

8
5
%
*
8
)

I
f

c
a
r
r
i
e
r

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

i
s

s
e
t

a
t

m
o
r
e

t
h
a
n

1
0
k
H
z



a
n
d

a
n

o
v
e
r
h
e
a
t

c
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n

(
d
e
t
e
c
t
e
d

b
y

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

t
h
e
r
m
a
l

s
e
n
s
o
r

)

o
c
c
u
r
s
,
i
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

w
i
l
l

a
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c
a
l
l
y

r
e
d
u
c
e

c
a
r
r
i
e
r

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

t
o

8
k
H
z


,






i
n

o
r
d
e
r

t
o

a
v
o
i
d

t
r
i
p
.
(
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e

u
p

t
o

3
0
H
P



u
n
i
t
)
*
9
)

W
h
e
n

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

i
n
t
o

0
.
1
,
t
h
e

s
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e

g
e
t
s

5
0
%

*
1
0
)

W
i
t
h

a

n
o
m
i
n
a
l

a
p
p
l
i
e
d

m
o
t
o
r
.
(
A
v
e
r
a
g
e

t
o
r
q
u
e

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r

d
e
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
e
s

a
n
d

s
t
o
p
s

f
r
o
m

6
0
H
z
.

I
t

m
a
y

c
h
a
n
g
e

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g

t
o

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r

l
o
s
s
.
)
*
1
1
)

A
b
o
v
e

1
2
0
H
z

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
,

p
l
e
a
s
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t

t
h
e

f
a
c
t
o
r
y
.

-
L
O
W

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
v
e

-
I
E
C

6
1
8
0
0
-
2

(
R
a
t
i
n
g
,

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

f
o
r

l
o
w

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

a
.
c
.

p
o
w
e
r

d
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
s
)



-
E
M
C

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
v
e

-
I
E
C

6
1
8
0
0
-
3

(
E
M
C

p
r
o
d
u
c
t

s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

i
n
c
l
u
d
i
n
g

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

t
e
s
t

m
e
t
h
o
d
s
)

S e t t i n g
T
y
p
e


d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n


(

*


*


i
n
d
i
c
a
t
e

p
r
o
d
u
c
t

r
e
v
i
s
i
o
n
)
6
K
P
1
1
2
3
_

_

_
X
1

*

*



(
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
)
6
K
P
1
1
2
3
_

_

_

X
2

*

*


(
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
2
)
6
K
P
1
1
2
3
_

_

_

X
4

*

*


(
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
4
)
6
K
P
1
1
2
3
_

_

_

X
8

*

*


(
O
p
e
n
,

T
y
p
e

1
2

H
e
a
t
s
i
n
k
)
6
K
P
1
1
2
3
_

_

_

X
9

*

*


(
O
p
e
n
)







1
/
2
0
0
0
0

o
f

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y



e
x
.
)

0
.
0
0
3
H
z

a
t

6
0
H
z

,

0
.
0
1
H
z

a
t

4
0
0
H
z







0
.
0
1
H
z

(
F
i
x
e
d
)
U
n
b
a
l
a
n
c
e

i
n

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

[
%
]

=


X

6
7



[
%
]
11-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
T
h
r
e
e
-
p
h
a
s
e

4
6
0
V

s
e
r
i
e
s
F
5
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
5
0
0
7
0
1
0
0
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
5
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
3
5
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
N
o
r
m
i
n
a
l

4
6
0
V

s
y
s
t
e
m

a
p
p
l
i
e
d

m
o
t
o
r
H
P

1
/
2
1
2
3
5
7
.
5
1
0
1
5
2
0
2
5
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
5
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
3
5
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
5
0
0
6
0
0

R
a
t
e
d

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

*
1
)
k
V
A

1
.
1
1
.
9
2
.
9
4
.
3
7
.
1
1
0
1
4
1
9
2
3
3
1
3
5
4
7
5
9
7
2
8
9
1
1
9
1
4
0
1
6
7
2
0
1
2
4
2
3
0
0
3
3
0
4
1
4
4
6
6
5
1
8
5
9
0

R
a
t
e
d

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

*
2
)

V


3
-
p
h
a
s
e
,



3
8
0
V

,

4
0
0
V

,

4
1
5
V

/
5
0
H
z

,









3
8
0
V

,

4
0
0
V

,

4
4
0
V

,

4
6
0
V

/
6
0
H
z











R
a
t
e
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

*
3
)
A

1
.
5
2
.
5
3
.
7
5
.
5
9
.
0
1
3
1
8
2
4
3
0
3
9
4
5
6
0
7
5
9
1
1
1
2
1
5
0
1
7
6
2
1
0
2
5
3
3
0
4
3
7
7
4
1
5
5
2
0
5
8
5
6
5
0
7
4
0

O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d

C
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

1
5
0
%


o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

1
m
i
n

,



1
5
0
%


o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

1
m
i
n

,




2
0
0
%


o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

0
.
5
s


1
8
0
%


o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

0
.
5
s



R
a
t
e
d

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
H
z


5
0
,


6
0
H
z


I
n
p
u
t


P
h
a
s
e
s
,


V
o
l
t
a
g
e
,


F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

3
-
p
h
a
s
e
,



3
8
0

t
o

4
8
0
V

,



5
0
/
6
0
H
z


3
-
p
h
a
s
e
,



3
8
0

t
o

4
4
0
V

/
5
0
H
z


,


3
8
0

t
o

4
8
0
V

/
6
0
H
z

r
a
t
i
n
g
s
















*

3
8
0
V
/
5
0
H
z

a
n
d

3
8
0

t
o

4
1
5
V
/
6
0
H
z



*
4
)

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

/

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

v
a
r
i
a
t
i
o
n
s





-
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

:

+
1
0

t
o

-
1
5
%


(

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

u
n
b
a
l
a
n
c
e

*
5
)

:

2
%

o
r

l
e
s
s


)

-
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

:
+
5

t
o

-
5
%


M
o
m
e
n
t
a
r
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

d
i
p


W
h
e
n

t
h
e

i
n
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

i
s

3
1
0
V


o
r

m
o
r
e
,


t
h
e

i
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

c
a
n

b
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
e
d

c
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s
l
y
.


c
a
p
a
b
i
l
i
t
y

*
6
)

W
h
e
n

t
h
e

i
n
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

d
r
o
p
s

b
e
l
o
w

3
1
0
V



f
r
o
m

r
a
t
e
d

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
,


t
h
e

i
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

c
a
n

b
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
e
d

f
o
r

1
5
m
s

.

(
l
e
s
s

t
h
a
n

8
5
%


l
o
a
d

o
f

n
o
m
i
n
a
l

a
p
p
l
i
e
d

m
o
t
o
r
s
)


T
h
e

s
m
o
o
t
h

r
e
c
o
v
e
r
y

m
e
t
h
o
d

i
s

s
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e
.


O
u
t
p
u
t

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

F
r
e
q
.

5
0

t
o

4
0
0
H
z


*
1
0
)

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y


B
a
s
e

F
r
e
q
.

2
5

t
o

4
0
0
H
z


*
1
0
)
S
e
t
t
i
n
g

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

F
r
e
q
.

0
.
1

t
o

6
0
H
z



,


C
o
n
t
i
n
u
o
u
s

t
i
m
e

:

0
.
0

t
o

1
0
.
0
s


C
a
r
r
i
e
r

F
r
e
q
.

*
8
)

0
.
7
5


t
o

1
5
k
H
z


0
.
7
5


t
o

1
0
k
H
z


T
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

c
a
r
r
i
e
r

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

c
h
a
n
g
e
s

d
e
p
e
n
d

o
n

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

o
u
t
p
u
t

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
.


A
c
c
u
r
a
c
y

(
S
t
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
)

-
A
n
a
l
o
g

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

0
.
2
%

o
f

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

(
a
t

2
5

1
0

d
e
g
r
e
e
s

C
)

-
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

0
.
0
1
%

o
f

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

(
a
t

-
1
0

t
o

+
5
0

d
e
g
r
e
e
s

C
)

S
e
t
t
i
n
g

r
e
s
o
l
u
t
i
o
n

-
A
n
a
l
o
g

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

1
/
3
0
0
0

o
f

M
a
x
.

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y



e
x
.
)

0
.
0
2
H
z


a
t

6
0
H
z


,

0
.
1
5
H
z


a
t

4
0
0
H
z



-
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

:

0
.
0
1
H
z


a
t

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

o
f

u
p

t
o

9
9
.
9
9
H
z


(
0
.
1
H
z


a
t

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

o
f

1
0
0
H
z


a
n
d

a
b
o
v
e
)

-
L
i
n
k

s
e
t
t
i
n
g
:

T
w
o

m
e
t
h
o
d
s

a
r
e

s
e
l
e
c
t
a
b
l
e
.

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

V
o
l
t
/
F
r
e
q

C
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c

3
2
0

t
o

4
8
0
V

(
w
i
t
h

A
V
R

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

a
t

b
a
s
e

a
n
d

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
,


a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e




T
o
r
q
u
e

b
o
o
s
t
C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t

t
o
r
u
q
u
e

l
o
a
d

V
a
r
i
a
b
l
e

t
o
r
q
u
e

l
o
a
d

A
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c

(
s
e
t
t
i
n
g

c
o
d
e
)
0
.
0
-

M
a
n
u
a
l





(
s
e
t
t
i
n
g

c
o
d
e
)
2
.
0

t
o

2
0
.
0
0
.
1

t
o

1
.
9


*
9
)

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e


2
0
0
%


(
w
i
t
h

D
y
n
a
m
i
c

t
o
r
q
u
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d
)

1
8
0
%


(
w
i
t
h

D
y
n
a
m
i
c

t
o
r
q
u
e

v
e
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d
)

B
r
a
k
i
n
g

B
r
a
k
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e
1
5
0
%
1
0
0
%
2
0
%



*
1
1
)
1
5

t
o

1
0
%



*
1
1
)
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s

T
i
m
e


s

5
5

N
o

l
i
m
i
t

D
u
t
y

c
y
c
l
e



%

5
3
5
3
2
3
2

N
o

l
i
m
i
t

B
r
a
k
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e
1
5
0
%

1
0
0
%
O
p
t
i
o
n
s

T
i
m
e


s

4
5
4
5
3
0
2
0
1
0
8
1
0

D
u
t
y

c
y
c
l
e



%

2
2
1
0
7
5
5
5
1
0

D
C

i
n
j
e
c
t
i
o
n

b
r
a
k
i
n
g

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

:

0
.
1

t
o

6
0
.
0
H
z

,




B
r
a
k
i
n
g

t
i
m
e

:

0
.
0

t
o

3
0
.
0
s
,



B
r
a
k
i
n
g

l
e
v
e
l

:

0

t
o

1
0
0
%


o
f

r
a
t
e
d

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
,

T
y
p
e

4














N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
,

T
y
p
e
1
2















O
p
e
n
,

O
p
e
n

w
i
t
h

N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e

1
2

H
e
a
t
s
i
n
k
,

N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e

1

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

m
e
t
h
o
d











N
a
t
u
r
a
l
F
a
n

c
o
o
l
i
n
g

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s


-
U
L
/
c
U
L



N
O
T
E
S

*
1
)

I
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

o
u
t
p
u
t

c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

[
k
V
A
]

a
t

4
6
0
V
.

*
2
)

O
u
t
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

i
s

p
r
o
p
o
r
t
i
o
n
a
l

t
o

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

a
n
d

c
a
n
'
t

e
x
c
e
e
d

t
h
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
.

*
3
)

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

d
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

m
a
y

b
e

r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d

i
n

c
a
s
e

o
f

l
o
w

i
m
p
e
d
a
n
c
e

l
o
a
d

s
u
c
h

a
s

h
i
g
h

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

m
o
t
o
r
.

*
4
)

C
h
a
n
g
e

t
h
e

t
a
p

o
f

a
u
x
i
l
i
a
r
y

t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
.






3
8
0
V
/
5
0
H
z

a
n
d

3
8
0

t
o

4
1
5
V
/
6
0
H
z

:

C
h
a
n
g
e

o
v
e
r

C
N

U
X

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

f
r
o
m

U
1

p
a
r
t

t
o

U
2

p
a
r
t
.

(
R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

t
o

t
h
e

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n

m
a
n
u
a
l
)
I
n
p
u
t

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
C
N

U
X

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

4
0
0

t
o

4
4
0
V
/
5
0
H
z
,

4
4
0

t
o

4
8
0
V
/
6
0
H
z
U
1

(
F
a
c
t
o
r
y

s
e
t
t
i
n
g
)

3
8
0
V
/
5
0
H
z

(
3
9
8
V

o
r

s
m
a
l
l
e
r
)
,


3
8
0

t
o

4
1
5
V
/
6
0
H
z

(
4
3
0
V

o
r

s
m
a
l
l
e
r
)

*
5
)

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e

t
o

t
h
e

I
E
C

6
1
8
0
0
-
3
(

5
.
2
.
3

)
(
M
a
x
i
m
u
m

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
[
V
]

-

M
i
n
i
m
u
m

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
[
V
]

)
3
-
p
h
a
s
e

a
v
e
r
a
g
i
n
g

v
o
l
t
a
g
e
V


*
6
)

I
n
p
u
t

p
o
w
e
r

:

8
5
%

*
8
)

I
f

c
a
r
r
i
e
r

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

i
s

s
e
t

a
t

m
o
r
e

t
h
a
n

1
0
k
H
z


a
n
d

a
n

o
v
e
r
h
e
a
t

c
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n

(
d
e
t
e
c
t
e
d

b
y

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

t
h
e
r
m
a
l

s
e
n
s
o
r

)

o
c
c
u
r
s
,

i
n
v
e
r
t
e
r

w
i
l
l

a
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c
a
l
l
y

r
e
d
u
c
e

c
a
r
r
i
e
r

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

t
o

8
k
H
z

,









i
n

o
r
d
e
r

t
o

a
v
o
i
d

t
r
i
p
.
(
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e

u
p

t
o

3
0
H
P


u
n
i
t
)

*
9
)

W
h
e
n

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

i
n
t
o

0
.
1
,

t
h
e

s
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

t
o
r
q
u
e

g
e
t
s

5
0
%


*
1
0
)

A
b
o
v
e

1
2
0
H
z

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
,

p
l
e
a
s
e

c
o
n
t
a
c
t

t
h
e

f
a
c
t
o
r
y

*
1
1
)

W
i
t
h

a

n
o
m
i
n
a
l

a
p
p
l
i
e
d

m
o
t
o
r
.
(
A
v
e
r
a
g
e

t
o
r
q
u
e

w
h
e
n

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r

d
e
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
e
s

a
n
d

s
t
o
p
s

f
r
o
m

6
0
H
z
.

I
t

m
a
y

c
h
a
n
g
e

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g

t
o

t
h
e

m
o
t
o
r

l
o
s
s
.
)

-
L
O
W

V
O
L
T
A
G
E

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
v
e

-
I
E
C

6
1
8
0
0
-
2


R
a
t
i
n
g
,

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

f
o
r

l
o
w

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

a
.
c
.
p
o
w
e
r

d
r
i
v
e

s
y
s
t
e
m
s
)



-
E
M
C

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
v
e

-
I
E
C

6
1
8
0
0
-
3

(
E
M
C

p
r
o
d
u
c
t

s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

i
n
c
l
u
d
i
n
g

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

t
e
s
t

m
e
t
h
o
d
s
)







1
/
2
0
0
0
0

o
f

M
a
x
i
m
u
m

f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y



e
x
.
)

0
.
0
0
3
H
z

a
t

6
0
H
z

,


0
.
0
1
H
z

a
t

4
0
0
H
z






0
.
0
1
H
z

(
F
i
x
e
d
)
U
n
b
a
l
a
n
c
e

i
n

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
a
g
e


[
%
]


=


X

6
7



[
%
]
U
2
T
y
p
e


d
e
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n

(

*


*


i
n
d
i
c
a
t
e

p
r
o
d
u
c
t

r
e
v
i
s
i
o
n
)
6
K
P
1
1
4
3
_

_

_
X
1

*

*



(
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
)
6
K
P
1
1
4
3
_

_

_

X
2

*

*


(
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e
1
2
)
6
K
P
1
1
4
3
_

_

_

X
4

*

*


(
N
E
M
A

T
y
p
e

4
)
6
K
P
1
1
4
3
_

_

_

X
8

*

*


(
O
p
e
n
,

T
y
p
e

1
2

H
e
a
t
s
i
n
k
)
6
K
P
1
1
4
3
_

_

_

X
9

*

*


(
O
p
e
n
)
11-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
11.2 Common Specifications
Explanation
Sinusoidal wave PWM control (with V/F control, torque vector control, PG feedback vector
control (option)
Maximum
frequency
50 to 400 Hz variable setting
Base
frequency
25 to 400 Hz variable setting
Starting
frequency
0.1 to 60 Hz variable setting Holding time: 0.0 to 10.0 s
Carrier
frequency
0.75 to 15k Hz (75 HP or less) 0.75 to 10k Hz (100 HP or more)
Accuracy
(stability)
Analog setting: +/- 0.2% or less of the max. frequency (at 25 +/- 10C)
Digital Setting: +/- 0.01% or less of the max frequency (-10 to +50C)
Setting
resolution
Analog setting: 1/3000 of max. frequency (e.g. 0.02 Hz / 60 Hz, 0.05 Hz / 150 Hz) Digital setting: 0.01
Hz (99.99 Hz or less), 0.1 Hz (100.0 Hz or more)
Output voltage at base frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (200V series) or
320 to 480V (400V series)
Auto: Optimum control corresponding to the load torque.
Manual: 0.1 to 20.0 code setting (energy savings reduced torque, constant torque (strong) etc.)
0.01 to 3600s
Four accelerating and decelerating time settings are possible independent of each other by
selecting digital input signals.
In addition to linear acceleration and deceleration, either S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
(weal/strong) or curvilinear acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
Starting frequency: 0.0 to 60 Hz, braking time: 0.0 to 30.0s
Braking levels: 0 to 100%
Frequency upper and lower limiter, bias frequency, frequency gain, jump frequency, pick-up
operation, restart after momentary power failure, switching operation from line to drive, slip
compensation control, automatic energy saving operation, regeneration avoiding control, torque
limiting (2-strp), PID control, second motor switching, cooling fan ON/OFF control.
Keypad panel: Run by FWD REV keys, stop by STOP key.
Terminal input: Forward/Stop command, Reverse/Stop command, Coast-to-Stop command,
Alarm reset, acceleration/deceleration selection, multistep frequency selection, etc.
Keypad panel: setting by UP and DOWN keys
External potentiometer: External freq. Setting POT (VR) (1 to 5k ohm)
Analog input: 0 to +10V (0 to 5V), 4 to 20 mA, o to 10V (FWD/REV operation)
+10 to 0 (reverse operation), 20 to 4 mA (reverse operation)
UP/DOWN control: Frequency increases or decreases as long as the digital input signals are
turned on
Multistep frequency selection: Up to 15 steps are selectable by a combination of digital input
signals (four kinds)
Link operation: Operation by RS485 (standard)
Program operation: Pattern operation by program
Jogging operation: Jogging operation by FWD, REV key or digital input signals.
Transistor output (4 signals): Running, frequency, arrival, frequency detection, overload early
warning, etc.
Relay output (2 signals): Alarm output (for any fault), multi-purpose output signals
Analog output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output voltage, output torque, power
consumption, etc.
Pulse output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output power, output torque, power
consumption, etc.
Item
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
Frequency setting
Operation status signal
Control Method
Output
frequency
Voltage/frequency
Characteristics
Torque Boost
Accelerating/decelerating
time
Function equipped
Operation method
DC injection braking
11-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
11.2 Common Specifications (continued)
Explanation
Output frequency, setting frequency, output current, output voltage, motor synchronous speed,
line speed, load rotation speed, calculated PID value, PID command value, PID feedback value,
alarm code.
Operation information, operational guide, functional code/name/setting data, alarm information,
tester function, motor load rate measuring function (Maximum/average current (rms) during
measuring period, maintenance information (integrated operation hours, capacitance
measurement for main circuit capacitors, heatsink temperature, etc.
Six languages (Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, Italian)
Charging (voltage residual), operation indication
Overcurrent, short-circuit, ground fault, overvoltage, undervoltage, overload, overheating, blown
fuse, motor overload, external alarm, input open-phase, output open0phase (when tuning),
braking resistor protection, CPU and memory error, keypad panel communications error, PTC
thermistor protection, surge protection, stall prevention, etc.
Indoor, altitude less than 3300 feet (1000m), free from corrosive gas, dust and direct sunlight.
-10 to +50C (+14 to 122F) (ventilating cover must be removed under conditions exceeding +40C
(+104F) in the panel for models rated at 30 HP or less)
3mm peak from 2-9 Hz, 9.8 m/s
2
from 9-20 Hz, 2m/s
2
from 20-55 Hz, 1 m/s
2
from 55-200 Hz,
Storage
Ambient
temperature
-25 to 65C (-13 to 149F)
Ambient
humidity
5 to 95% (no condensation)
Installation location
Ambient temperature
Vibration
E
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
I
n
d
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Item
Liquid crystal display
Digital display LED
Language
Lamp display
Protective function
11-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
11.3 Outline Dimensions
0.24(6)
0
.
2
8
(
7
)
1
0
.
2
5
(
2
6
0
)
9
.
6
9
(
2
4
6
)
4.29(109)
3.43(87)
3.74(95)
0.31(8)
0
.
2
8
(
7
)
0.28(6)
1.22(31)
1.73(44) 1.22(31)
3-0.87(22)
3
.
9
2
(
9
9
.
5
)
0.28(7)
3.78(96)
4.34(110)
0.28(7)
0.24(6)
1.56(39.5)
0
.
2
8
(
7
)
0.61(15.5)
D2
3-0.87(22)
D
4
1
.
0
6
(
2
7
)
D
D1
0.24(6)
2.42 (61.5)
5.71(145)
0
.
2
8
(
7
)
1
0
.
2
5
(
2
6
0
)
9
.
6
9
(
2
4
6
)
0.61(15.5)
5.91(150)
5.35(136)
2-0.24(6)
0.28(7)
0.31(8)
0.47(12)
9.84(250)
8.90(226)
0.47(12)
7.68(195)
4.17(106)
0.39(10)
0
.
4
4
(
1
1
)
1
5
.
7
6
(
4
0
0
)
1
4
.
8
8
(
3
7
8
)
2-0.39(10)
5.06(128.5)
5.12(130)
6.26(159)
0
.
4
4
(
1
1
)
2.17(55)
0.39(10)
2.54(64.5)
2.42(61.5)
1.34(34)
2-1.65(42)
5
.
7
5
(
1
4
6
)
D3
0.31(8)
0.47(12)
8.66(220)
7.72(196)
2-0.39(10)
0.47(12)
0
.
4
4
(
1
1
)
4.09(104)
0.39(10)
7.68(195)
5.49(139.5)
5.67(144)
6.26(159)
0.31(8)
0
.
4
4
(
1
1
)
2.07(52.5)
2-1.34(34)
1.81(46)
2.28(58)
1.06(27)
5
.
5
1
(
1
4
0
)
1
0
.
2
5
(
2
6
0
)
9
.
3
7
(
2
3
8
)
0.39(10)
(M3, 5)
(M5)
(M3)
(M4)
(M3, 5)
(M3)
Main circuit terminals
Wire inlet
knock out
hole
Wire inlet
Knock out
hole
Auxiliary control
power supply terminals
Wire inlet
knock out hole
Auxiliary control
power supply terminals
Main circuit terminals
Control circuit terminals
M3
(M3, 5)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
N
P
N
P
N
P
N
P
Control circuit terminals
0.28(7)
2-0.24(6)
Wire inlet
knock out hole
Wire inlet
knock out hole
Wire inlet
knock out hole
(M3, 5)
(M5)
(M3)
Auxiliary control
power supply terminals
Main circuit terminals
Control circuit terminals
2 to 5 Hp
7.5, 10 Hp
15 to 30 Hp
Type D D1 D2 D3 D4
1/4, 1/2 Hp 5.12 1.44 3.15 3.7 2.81
(130) (26.5) (80) (94) (71.5)
1 Hp 5.71 2.03 3.74 4.29 3.41
(145) (51.5) (95) (109) (86.5)
11-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
11.3.1 Outline Dimensions NEMA 1
230V Series NEMA 1
Mtg. Wt.
W1 W3 W4 H1 H2 H3 H6 H7 H9 H10 D D2 D3 D4 Bolts Lb (kg)
40 9.4 13.5 20.9 19.7 20.2 0.4 7.1 3 29.7 10 0.2 5.7 4.1 M8 70
(240) (342) (530) (500) (512) (9) (180) (75) (755) (255) (4) (145) (105) (32)
50 10.8 14.9 23.4 22.2 22.7 7.9 33.1 10.6 86
(275) (377) (595) (565) (577) (200) (840) (270) (39)
60 28.3 27.2 27.6 38 106
(720) (690) (702) (965) (48)
75 110
(50)
100 16.9 21 27 27.4 0.5 11.1 3.3 41.3 11.2 3.6 M12 172
(430) (533) (685) (695) (13) (283) (83) (1050) (285) (91) (78)
125 22.8 11.4 26.9 33.5 32.1 32.5 15.1 50.4 14.2 8.7 6.5 282
(580) (290) (683) (850) (815) (825) (383) (1280) (360) (220) (166) (128)
460V Series NEMA 1
Mtg. Wt.
W1 W3 W4 H1 H2 H3 H6 H7 H9 H10 D D2 D3 D4 Bolts Lb (kg)
40 9.4 13.5 20.9 19.7 20.2 0.4 7.1 3 29.7 10 0.2 5.7 4.1 M8 70
(240) (342) (530) (500) (512) (9) (180) (75) (755) (255) (4) (145) (105) (32)
50 10.8 14.9 10.6 82
(275) (377) (270) (37)
60 25.8 24.6 25.1 34.6 95
(655) (625) (637) (880) (43)
75 97
(44)
100 28.3 27.2 27.6 7.9 38 115
(720) (690) (702) (200) (965) (52)
125 16.9 21 28 26.6 27 0.5 8.2 3.3 12.4 6.9 4.7 M12 174
150 (430) (533) (710) (675) (685) (13) (208) (83) (315) (175) (121) (79)
200 38 37 37 13 53.1 14.2 8.7 7 245
250 (970) (935) (945) (333) (1350) (360) (220) (166) (111)
300 22.8 11.4 26.9 15.1 55.1 337
350 (580) (290) (683) (383) (1400) (153)
Hp
Hp
DIMENSIONS inches (mm)
DIMENSIONS inches (mm)
11-7
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Surface Mount
460V Series NEMA 1
W W1 W3 W4 W5 W6 H1 H2 H4 H8 H9 D D1
400 26.8 22.8 11.4 24.0 21.9 53.9 52.4 52.6 3.3 57.1 17.7 11.2
450 (680) (580) (290) (610) (555) (1370) (1330) (1335) (084) (1450) (450) (285)
500 34.6 30.7 10.2 10.2 31.9 29.7
600 (880) (780) (260) (260) (810) (755)
Mtg. Wt.
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Bolts Lb (kg)
500 0.3 2.0 3.9 1.4 4.5 8.7 562
600 (6) (50) (100) (35) (115) (220) (255)
700 804
800 (365)

Hp
M12
Hp
DIMENSIONS inches (mm)
DIMENSIONS inches (mm)
W
W6
H8
H2 H9
D7
D1
D2
D
D3
D4
4-C
W5
D5
D6
W1
W3 W4
H1
Holes for
mtg. bolts
11-8
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
11.3.2 Outline Dimensions Open Type
Surface Mount Through Panel Mount
230V Series
Hp Mtg. Weight
230V W W1 W2 W3 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D D1 D2 C Bolts Lb (kg)
40 13.4 9.4 12.8 21.7 20.9 19.7 20.2 0.5 1 0.4 10 5.7 0.2 0.4 M8 64
(340) (240) (326) (550) (530) (500) (512) (12) (25) (9) (255) (145) (4) (10) (29)
50 14.8 10.8 14.2 24.2 23.4 22.2 22.7 10.6 79
(375) (275) (361) (615) (595) (565) (577) (270) (36)
60 29.1 28.3 27.2 27.6 97
(740) (720) (690) (702) (44)
75 101
(46)
100 20.9 16.9 20.1 29.5 27 27.4 0.6 1.3 0.5 11.2 0.6 M12 154
(530) (430) (510) (750) (685) (695) (16) (33) (13) (285) (15) (70)
125 26.8 22.8 26 34.6 33.5 32.1 32.5 14.2 8.7 253
(680) (580) (660) (880) (850) (815) (825) (360) (220) (115)
460V Series
Hp Mtg. Weight
460V W W1 W2 W3 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D D1 D2 C Bolts Lb (kg)
40 13.4 9.4 12.8 21.7 20.9 19.7 20.2 0.5 1 0.4 10 5.7 0.2 0.4 M8 64
(340) (240) (326) (550) (530) (500) (512) (12) (25) (9) (255) (145) (4) (10) (29)
50 14.8 10.8 14.2 10.6 75
(375) (275) (361) (270) (34)
60 26.6 25.8 24.6 25.1 86
(675) (655) (625) (637) (39)
75 88
(40)
100 29.1 28.3 27.2 27.6 106
(740) (720) (690) (702) (48)
125 20.9 16.9 20.1 28 26.6 27 0.6 1.3 0.5 12.4 6.9 0.6 M12 154
150 (530) (430) (510) (710) (675) (682) (16) (33) (13) (315) (175) (15) (70)
200 39.4 38.2 36.8 37.2 14.2 8.7 220
250 (1000) (970) (935) (945) (360) (220) (100)
300 26.8 22.8 26 11.4 308
350 (680) (580) (660) (290) (140)
DIMENSION Inch (mm)
DIMENSION Inch (mm)
H1
11-9
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
460V Series Open Type
W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 D D1
400 26.8 22.8 26.0 11.4 24.0 55.1 53.9 52.4 52.8 52.6 0.6 1.4 0.6 17.7 11.2
450 (680) (580) (660) (290) (610) (1400) (1370) (1330) (1340) (1335) (016) (035) (015) (450) (285)
500 34.6 30.7 33.8 10.2 10.2 31.9
600 (880) (780) (860) (260) (260) (810)
Mtg. Wt.
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C Bolts Lb (kg)
400 0.3 2 3.9 1.4 4.5 0.6 551
450 (6) (50) (100) (35) (115) (015) (250)
500 793
600 (360)


Hp
DIMENSIONS inches (mm)
M12

Hp DIMENSIONS inches (mm)


W
W1
W3 W4
H2 H1 H
C
W5
D5
D6
D3
D4
3 or 4 dia. C
D2
D1
D
W1
W3 W4
H1
Holes for
mtg. bolts
D2
D1
W2
W1
W3 W4
Holes for
mtg. bolts
H7
H3 H1
D2
D1
4-dia.1.4 (35)
Lifting bolts
W2
W
H7
W3 W4
H4
Holes for
mtg. bolts
4-C
H4
H6 H6
Surface Mount
Through Panel Mount
Alternative Through
Panel Mount (bottom
bracket support by
customer supply.
11-10
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
11.3.3 Outline Dimensions Open Type with NEMA 12 Heatsink
11-11
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
AF-300 P11 230 VAC Series
DIMENSIONS Inch(mm) Fixing Wt. Fig
W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 C D D1 Bolts Lb(kg)
40
50
15.04 14.41 13.39 12.83 9.45 4.72 21.65 20.87 19.69 20.16 3.74 20.87 8.86 66 1
(382) (366) (340) (326) (240) (120) (550) (530) (500) (512) (95) (530) (225) (30)
60 24.21 23.43 22.24 22.72 0.47 0.98 0.35 1.67 6.69 23.43 0.43 0.4 5.71 M6 81
16.42 15.79 14.76 14.21 10.83 5.41 (615) (595) (565) (577) (12) (25) (9) (42.5) (170) (595) (11) (10) 10.63 (145) and (37)
75 (417) (401) (375) (361) (275) - (137.5) - - - 29.13 27.17 27.64 4.13 - - (270) M8 99
(740) 28.35 (690) (702) (105) 28.35 (45) 2
100 (720) (720) 104
(47)
125 23.23 22.28 20.87 20.08 16.93 8.46 29.53 26.97 27.36 1.75 8.27 11.22 5.71 M6 161
(590) (566) (530) (510) (430) (215) (750) (685) (695) 0.61 1.28 0.49 (44.5) (210) 0.51 0.6 (285) (145) and (73)
150 29.13 28.19 26.77 25.98 22.83 11.42 - 2.95 34.65 33.46 32.09 32.48 (15.5) (32.5) (12.5) 4.02 8.46 33.46 (13) (15) 14.17 8.66 M12 260 4
(740) (716) (680) (660) (580) (290) (75) (880) (850) (815) (825) (102) (215) (850) (360) (220) (118)
AF-300 P11 460 VAC Series
DIMENSIONS Inch(mm) Fixing Wt Fig
W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 C D D1 Bolts Lb(kg)
40
50
15.04 14.41 13.39 12.83 9.45 4.72 8.86 66
(382) (366) (340) (326) (240) (120) 21.65 20.87 19.69 20.16 3.74 20.87 (225) (30) 1
60 (550) (530) (500) (512) (95) (530) M6 77
0.47 0.98 0.35 6.69 0.43 0.4 5.71 and (35)
75 16.42 15.79 14.76 14.21 10.83 5.41 26.57 25.79 24.61 25.08 (12) (25) (9) 2.85 (170) 25.79 (11) (10) 10.63 (145) M8 88
(417) (401) (375) (361) (275) (137.5) (675) (655) (625) (637) (72.5) (655) (270) (40)
100 - - - - 90 2
(41)
125 29.13 28.35 27.17 27.64 4.13 28.35 108
(740) (720) (690) (702) (105) (720) - - (49)
29.13 27.95 26.57 26.97 1.56 8.27 27.95 12.4 6.89 161
200 (740) (710) (675) (685) (39.5) (210) (710) (315) (175) (73)
23.23 22.28 20.87 20.08 16.93 8.46 0.61 1.28 0.49 0.51 0.6 M6
250 (590) (566) (530) (510) (430) (215) (15.5) (32.5) (12.5) (13) (15) and 229 3
300 39.37 38.19 36.81 37.20 2.15 8.46 38.19 14.17 8.66 M12 (104)
350 29.13 28.19 26.77 25.98 22.83 11.42 2.95 (1000) (970) (935) (945) (54.5) (215) (970) (360) (220) 317
400
450
(740) (716) (680) (660) (580) (290) - (75) (144) 5
500 29.13 28.19 26.77 25.98 22.83 11.42 2.95 4.55 2.60 M8 551 6
650 (740) (716) (680) (660) (580) (290) (75) (115.5) (66) 55.12 53.94 52.36 52.76 0.61 1.38 0.57 0.18 6.99 8.46 5.71 54.37 0.81 0.59 17.72 11.22 and (250)
700 37.01 36.06 34.65 33.86 30.71 10.24 4.72 2.76 2.56 4.33 (1400) (1370) (1330) (1340) (15.5) (35) (14.5) (4.5) (177.5) (215) (145) (1381) (20.5) (15) (450) (285) M12 793 7
800 (940) (916) (880) (860) (780) (260) (120) (70) (65) (110) (360)
HP
HP
150
11-12
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Keypad Mounting Hole (Panel Cutting)
Dimensions in inches (mm)
2.52 (64)
1.69 (42)
dia. 0.11 M3
0
.
8
1

(
2
0
.
5
)
4
.
5
3

(
1
1
5
)
dia. 1.38 (35)
12-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
The serial interface supports operation, configuration and monitoring of drive functions through an EIA/RS485 connec-
tion. The serial interface is based on Modbus RTU protocol. This protocol allows the drive to function as an RTU slave
on an industrial network.
12.1 Transmission Specification
Item Specification
Physical level EIA/RS485
Transmission distance 500 m max.
Number of nodes 32 total
Transmission speed 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 [bits/s]
Transmission mode Half duplex
Transmission protocol Modbus RTU
Character code Binary
Character length 8 bits
Error check CRC
12.2 Connection
Connection method
Use shielded wire and connect to the control terminals (DX-, DX+ and SD). A termination resistor should be added
between the data lines on the each end of the network. The value of the termination resistor depends on the character-
istic impedance of the cable. A common value for termination resistors is 120 ohms.
Control terminals
Terminal
marking Terminal name Function description
DX+ RS485 communication data (+) Input/output terminals for RS485
DX- RS485 communication data () communication.
SD Cable shield Electrically floating
12.3 Serial Interface Configuration
Drive function codes H30 to H39 are used to configure the serial interface parameters, such as device address, baud
rate and error response.
12.4 Modbus RTU Functions
The following RTU functions are supported. The maximum number of consecutive parameters for function 03 and 16
messages is 16.
Code Description
03 Read Holding Registers (16 registers maximum)
06 Preset Single Register
16 Preset Multiple Registers (16 registers maximum)
12. RS485 Modbus RTU Serial Communications
12-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
12.5 Drive Function Code Access
All of the drive function codes are accessible through the RS485 serial interface. Drive function codes are mapped to
RTU holding registers. A drive function code RTU address is 2 bytes in length. The high byte corresponds to a code that
represents the drive parameter sort (FM). The low byte corresponds to the drive parameter number within the sort (0 -
99).
Code Sort Name Code Sort Name
0 F Basic function 5 A Motor 2 function
1 E Terminal function 6 o Option function
2 C Control function 7 S Command/function data
3 P Motor 1 function 8 M Monitor data
4 H High level function
For example, drive function code M11, output current, is addressed as RTU parameter number 080B hexadecimal or
2059 decimal.
12.6 Command and Monitor Data Registers
The command and monitor function codes are used to control the operation of the drive and monitor the status variables
through the serial interface. The command and monitor function codes are not accessible from the drive keypad
interface. Drive parameter H30 and digital input signal LE must be enabled to operate the drive from the Modbus
interface. If LE is not assigned to a digital input (X1-X9), the signal will default to ON.
Frequency Setting Registers
Read/ Data
Address Code Name Unit Variable Range Min. unit Write Format
1793 S01 Frequency command - -2000020000
(max. frequency at 20000) 1 R/W 2
1797 S05 Frequency command Hz 0.00400.00 0.01 R/W 5
Note:
1) If both S01 and S05 are set, the drive will ignore the setting of S05.
2) A data setting that exceeds the setting range is possible, but the actual action will be limited by the drive configura-
tion.
Operation command data Registers
Address Code Name Unit Variable Range Min. unit Read/ Data
Write Format
1798 S06 Operation command - Refer to the data format [14] - R/W 14
1799 S07 Universal Do - Refer to the data format [15] - R/W 15
1804 S12 Universal Ao - -2000020000 1 R/W 2
(100% output at 20000 )
Note:
1) Since X1X9 are configurable input commands, it is necessary to set the functions by E01E09.
2) The alarm reset is executed, when RST signal changes from ON to OFF even if there are no alarms.
3) Universal Do is a function that utilizes the drives digital outputs via communication.
Function data Registers
Address Code Name Unit Variable range Min. unit Read/ Data
Write Format
1800 S08 Acceleration time F07 s 0.13600.0 0.1 R/W 3
1801 S09 Deceleration time F08 s 0.13600.0 0.1 R/W 3
1802 S10 Torque limit level 1
(driving) F40
% -20.00 200.00, 999 1 R/W 5
1803 S11 Torque limit level 2
(braking) F41
% 0.00, 20.00200.00, 999 1 R/W 5
Note:
1) The writing of data out of range is treated as out of range error.
2) Use a value of 7FFF
H
to enter 999 for torque limit functions.
high byte low byte
drive parameter sort code drive parameter number
12-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Monitoring parameter registers
Address Code Description Unit Range Min. unit Read Data
/ Write Format
2049 M01 Frequency command (final
command)
- - 2000020000 (max. frequency
at 20000)
1 R 2
2053 M05 Frequency command (final
command)
Hz 0400.00 0.01 R 5
2054 M06 Actual frequency - - 2000020000 1 R 2
(max. frequency at 20000)
2055 M07 Actual torque value % - 200.00200.00 0.01 R 6
2056 M08 Torque current % - 200.00200.00 0.01 R 6
2057 M09 Output frequency Hz 0.00400.00 0.01 R 5
2058 M10 Motor output (input
electric power)
% 0.00200.00 0.01 R 5
2059 M11 Output current r. m. s. % 0.00200.00 (inverter rating at
100.00)
0.01 R 5
2060 M12 Output voltage r. m. s. V 0.0600.0 1 R 3
2061 M13 Operation command (final
command)
- Refer to data format [14] - R 14
2062 M14 Operating state - Refer to data format [16] - R 16
2063 M15 Universal output terminal
data
- Refer to data format [15] - R 15
2064 M16 Fault memory 0 - Refer to data format [10] - R 10
2065 M17 Fault memory 1 - 10
2066 M18 Fault memory 2 - 10
2067 M19 Fault memory 3 - 10
2068 M20 Integrated operating time h 065535 1 R 1
2069 M21 DC link voltage V 01000 1 R 1
2071 M23 Type code - Refer to data format [17] - R 17
2072 M24 Drive capacity code - Refer to data format [11] - R 11
2073 M25 ROM version - 064999 1 R 1
2074 M26 Transmission error
processing code
- Refer to data format [20] - R 20
2075 M27 Frequency command at
alarm (final command)
- - 2000020000 (max. frequency
at 20000 )
1 R 2
2079 M31 Frequency command at
alarm (final command)
Hz 0400.00 0.01 R 5
2080 M32 Actual frequency at alarm - - 2000020000 1 R 2
(max. frequency a t 20000)
2081 M33 Actual torque at alarm % - 200.00 200.00 0.01 R 6
2082 M34 Torque current at alarm % - 200.00 200.00 0.01 R 6
2083 M35 Output frequency at alarm Hz 0.00 400. 0.01 R 5
2084 M36 Motor output at alarm
(input power)
% 0.00200.00 0.01 R 5
2085 M37 Output current r.m.s. at
alarm
% 0.00 200.00 (inverter rating at
100.00)
0.01 R 5
2086 M38 Output voltage effective
value at alarm
V 0.0 600.0 1 R 3
2087 M39 Operation command at
alarm
- Refer to data format [14] - R 14
2088 M40 Operating state at alarm - Refer to data format [16] - R 16
2089 M41 Universal output terminal
data at alarm
- Refer to data format [15] - R 15
2090 M42 Integrated operation time
at alarm
h 065535 1 R 1
2091 M43 DC link voltage at alarm V 01000 1 R 1
2092 M44 Inverter internal air temp.
at alarm
C 0120 1 R 1
2093 M45 Cooling fin temp. at alarm C 0120 1 R 1
2094 M46 Life of main circuit
capacitor.
% 0.0100.0 0.1 R 3
2095 M47 Life of printed circuit
board capacitor.
h 065535 1 R 1
2096 M48 Life of cooling fan. h 065535 1 R 1
12-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
12.7 Data Format Specification
All data in the data field of communication frame shall be represented by a 16 bit length word.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data format [1] Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 1
Example If F15 (Frequency limit, upper)= 60Hz
60 = 003C
H
Data format [2] ] Integer data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 1
Example data = -20
-20 = FFEC
H
Data format [3] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.1
Example: If F17 (frequency gain setting signal) = 100.0%
100.0 X 10 = 1000 = 03E8
H
Data format [4] Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.1
Example If: C31 (Analog input offset adjust, terminal12) = - 5.0%
- 5.0 X 10= - 50 = FFCE
H
Data format [5] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.01
Example: If C05 (multi-step frequency 1) = 50.25Hz
50.25 X 100 = 5025 = 13A1
H
Data format [6] Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.01
Example: If M07 (actual torque value)= - 85.38%
- 85.38 X 100= - 8538=DEA6
H
Data format [7] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.001
Example: If o05 (follow - up side ASR 1 constant) = 0.105s
0.105 X 1000 = 105 = 0069
H
Data format [8] Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.001
Example: Data = -1.234
- 1.234 X 1000 = - 1234 = FB2E
H
Data format [9] Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 2
Example If P01 (Motor 1 number of poles) =2pole
2 = 0002
H
Data format [10] Alarm Code
16 bits binary data
12-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Code Code
0 No alarm - 22 Overheat, DB resistor dbH
1 Overcurrent, during acceleration (INV output ) OC1 23 Overload, motor 1 OL1
2 Overcurrent, during deceleration (INV output ) OC2 24 Overload, motor 2 OL2
3 Overcurrent, during steady state operation
(INV output )
OC3 25 Overload, drive OLU
5 Ground fault EF 27 Overspeed OS
6 Overvoltage, during acceleration OU1 28 PG wire break Pg
7 Over voltage, during deceleration OU2 31 Memory error Er1
8 Overvoltage, during steady state operation OU3 32 Keypad error Er2
10 DC undervoltage LU 33 CPU error Er3
11 Power supply open phase Lin 34 Option comm error Er4
14 Blown DC fuse FUS 35 Option error Er5
16 Output wiring error Er7 36 PL error Er6
17 Overheat, heat sink, inverter OH1 37 Output wiring error Er7
18 Overheat, outside thermal OH2 38 RS485 comm error Er8
19 Overheat, unit inside temp OH3
Description Description
Data format [11] Capacity code
Code Capacity (HP) Code Capacity (HP) Code Capacity (HP)
7 0.07 (spare) 2000 20 17500 175
15 0.15 (spare) 2500 25 20000 200
25 0.25 3000 30 25000 250
50 0.5 4000 40 30000 300
100 1 5000 50 35000 350
200 2 6000 60 40000 400
300 3 7500 75 45000 450
500 5 10000 100 50000 500
750 7.5 12500 125 60600 600
1000 10 15000 150 60700 700
1500 15 60800 800
Data format [12] Index data (ACC/DEC time, display coefficient)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0: Positive (+),
Polarity 0 0 0 Index portion Data portion
1: Negative ( - ) 0: 0.01 X
1: 0.1 X
2: 1 X
3: 10 X
001999 (0.009.99)
00999 (10.099.9)
100999 (100999)
100999 (10009990)
Example: If F07 (acceleration time 1) = 20.0 s
10.0 < 20< 99.9 index =1
20.0 = 0.1 X 200 0400
H
+ 00C8
H
= 04C8
H
12-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
BUSY WR RL ALM DEC ACC IL VL TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
RST 0 0 0 0 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1
Data format [13] Pattern operation
0: FWD
1: REV
Example) If C22 (Stage1) = 10.0s R2 (10s, reverse rotation, acceleration time 2/deceleration time 2)
Since 10.0 = 0.1 X 100 > 9000
H
+ 0400
H
+ 0064
H
= 9464
H
Data format [14] Operation command
(All bit are ON by 1)
Example If S06 (operation command) = FWD, X1 and X5 = ON
0000 0000 0100 0101
b
= 0045
H
Data format [15] Universal output terminal
(All bit are ON by 1)
Example) If M15 (Universal output terminal)=Y1 and Y5 = ON
0000 0000 0001 0001
b
= 0011
H
Data format [16] Operating state
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Direction
of rotation 0 Time Index portion Data portion
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0: 1
st
ACC/DEC time 0: 0.01 X 001999 (0.009.99)
1: 2
nd
ACC/DEC time 1: 0.1 X 100999 (10.099.9)
2: 3
rd
ACC/DEC time 2: 1 X 100999 (100999)
3: 4
th
ACC/DEC time 3: 10 X 100999 (10009990)
12-7
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Type Generation Series Voltage series
Data 4 Data 3 Data 2 Data 1
(All bit are ON or active by 1)
FWD: Forward operation IL: Current limiting
REV:0: Reverse operation ACC: Under acceleration
EXT: DC braking active (or pre-excitation) DEC: Under deceleration
ALM: Drive fault
INT: No Output RL: Transmission valid
BRK: Braking active WR: Function writing privlege
NUV: DC link voltage is established 0: Keypad panel
(undervoltage at 0) 1: RS485
TL: Torque limiting 2: Fieldbus (option)
VL: Voltage limiting BUSY: Processing data write
Data format [17] Type code
Code Type Generation Series Voltage series
1 - 11 - -
2 G - - -
3 P - - 230V three phase
4 - - - 460V three phase
5 - - USA -
6 - - - -
Data format [18] Code setting (14 figures)
Data format [19] Amperage value Decimal data (positive ):
Min. unit 0.01 inverter capacity is not more than 30HP
Min unit 0.01 for not less than 40HP
Example) If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)107.0A (40HP)
107.0 X 10=1070=042E
H
If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)=3.60A (1HP)
Since 3.60 X 100=360=0168
H
Data format [20] Transmission error code
Code Description Code
1 FC (function code) error 71 CRC error (no response)
2 Illegal address 72 Parity error (no response)
3 Illegal address (Data range error) 73 Other errors (no response)
-Framing error
-Overrun error
-Buffer full error
7 NAK
-Priority for comm
-No privilege for writing error
-Forbidden writing error
Description
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12-8
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Data format [21] Auto tuning
0: Without forward rotation command
1: With forward rotation command.
0: Without reverse rotation command.
1: With reverse rotation command.
Example) If P04 (motor 1 auto - tuning)=1: Forward rotation
0000 0001 0000 0001
b
=0101
H
12-7 Communication Errors
Exception Response
When the drive receives a message that does not contain communication errors but the message can not be processed,
the drive will return an exception response. The exception response contains an error sub-code in the data field that
represents the problem.
Exception Response Errors
Sub-Code Name Causes
1 Illegal Function Received RTU Function other than 03, 06 or 16
2 Illegal Data Address The starting parameter address is an unused drive parameter..

The starting parameter address plus the offset refers to drive


parameter greater than the last parameter in a Function Code sort.
The number of registers is greater than 16.
3 Illegal Data Value Data contains an out of range value for a drive parameter
7 Negative Acknowledge Requested data cannot be changed while the drive is running.

The drive parameter function is owned by the network interface


option card and cannot be changed.
Communication errors
Communication errors occur when the drive receives an invalid message. The drive will not return a response to a
communication error. A code that represents the last communication error is stored in drive parameter M26. Typical
communication message errors include parity, framing, and CRC errors.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 REV FWD Data portion
13-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
13. Options
The drive supports two internally mounted cards. One option card is mounted under the main cover (Location A) and
the other option card is mounted in a special adapter under the keypad (Location B). Only one card can be mounted
in these locations. There are two different types of option cards, Type 1 and Type 2. You cannot use two Type 1 or
Two Type 2 cards but you can mix any combination of Type 1 and Type 2 provided you only have one option per
mounting location. Each option card must be mounted in the designated location. The chart below lists the option
card, their types, and their mounting locations.
Name Type Loc 2nd Option Function
Type/Loc
OPCG11SRY 1 A 2/B Relay output card
(Relay output card) The transistor output from the drive control output terminals Y1
and Y4 are converted to the relay output (1SPDT).
OPCG11SDIO 2 A None Frequency setting by binary code (max. 16 bits)
(Digital interface card) Monitoring (8 bits) of frequency, output current, and output
voltage
OPCG11SAIO 2 A None Auxiliary input for analog frequency setting (0 to +/-10 V)
(Analog interface card) Monitoring of drive output frequency, current, and torque in
analog voltage, analog output 0-10 VDC abd 4-20mA
OPCG11SCIO 1 A 2/B 115 VAC Control input, an isolation amplifier,
(Interface card) relay output, PG encoder, analog output 4-20mA
OPCG11SLON 2 B 1/A Serial communication card for LonWorks
(Communication card)
OPCG11SPDP 2 B 1/A Serial communication card for Profibus-DP
(Communication card)
OPCG11SDEV 2 B 1/A Serial communication card for Device Net
(Communication card)
OPCG11SCOP 2 B 1/A Serial communication card for CAN
(Communication card)
OPCG11SMBP 2 B 1/A Serial commnication card for Modbus plus
(Communication card)
OPCG11SIBS 2 B 1/A Serial communcation card for Interbus-S
(Communcation card)
HE300GEN150 2 B 1/A Serial communication card for Genius
(Communication card)
13.1 Built-in Options
13-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Name Digital I/O interface card
Type OPCG11SDIO
Function 4 digital inputs: Binary code input of max. 16 bits or BCD input (Sink/Source changeable)
3 digital outputs: Binary code output of max. 8 bits.
Input Digital signal input (4 points) by short-circuiting terminals L1, L16 and M1
<Sink>
ON operation current: 4.5mA max.
OFF operation voltage: 27V max.
<Source>
ON operation current: 4.5mA max.
OFF operation voltage: 27V max.
Related function code: o19, o20
Output Digital signal output (3 points) by short-circuiting terminals between O1 to O6, and M2
<Sink>
ON operation current: 50mA max.
OFF operation voltage: 27V max.
<Source>
ON operation current: -50mA max.
OFF operation voltage: 27V max.
Related function code: o21
Power Source +24 VDC (3.2mA x 4 + 12.8mA)
Connection
diagram
Remarks
Specifications
L1/R
L2/S
L3/ T
U
V
W
I16
I15
I14
I13
I12
I11
I10
I9
I8
I7
I6
I5
I4
I3
I2
I1(LSB)
M1
O8(MSB)
O7
O6
O5
O4
O3
O2
O1(LSB)
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
M2
CM
A
F
-
3
0
0
P
1
1
O
P
C
-
P
1
1
S
-
D
I
O
Sink
G
M
13-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Name Analog I/O Interface Card
Type
Function
2 analog outputs (1 voltage output and 1 current output): 11 types of data can be output.
Specifications Input Analog signal input (3 points) 32 and 31, 22 and 21, C2 and 21.
Terminal 32: Voltage input (both sides): 0 to 10 VDC / 0 to 100%, input impedance: 22k ohm.
Terminal 22: Voltage input (both sides): 0 to +10 VDC / 0 to +100%, input impedance: 22k ohm.
Terminal C2: Current input: 4 to + 20mADC / 0 to +100%, input impedance: 250k ohm.
For voltage input, power supply terminal for variable resistor (P10) should be connected.
Related function code o22
Output Analog signal input (2 points) between AO+ and AO-, CS+ and CS-
Terminal AO+: Voltage output: 0 to 10 VDC, for max. 2 voltmeters, input impedance: 10k ohm
Terminal AO-: Voltage output common.
Terminal CS+: Current output: 4 to 20mAdc, max. 500 ohm
Terminal CS-: Current output common
(Terminal CS- is isloated from terminal 21, 31 and AO-)
Related function code o23
Connection
diagram
Remarks
3 analog inputs (2 voltage inputs and 1 current input): Torque limiting value (driving, braking), frquency setting, ratio setting
can be input respectively.
OPCG11SAIO
X9
X8
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
E(G)
SD
DX
A
DX
B
FM
P
FM
A
CM
CM
REV
FW
D
PLC
CM
E
AO-
AO+
C2
21
22
31
32
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5C
Y5A
C1
11
12
13
30C
30B
30A
(T0) *
AF-300P11
MCCB
or
ELCB
* Termi nals [ R0] an d [ T0] are no t provided f or 1.0 HP or small er.
RUN command
input
(R0) *
M
U
V
W
L3/T
L2/S
L1/R
CS+
CS-
(+)
(-)
(+)
VR
VR
(1k ohm)
(1k ohm)
Voltage input
(Single polarity)
Voltage input
(Both polarity)
Current input
Analog voltmeter
Anammeter
13-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Name Relay Output Card
Type Card type OPCG11SRY
Unit type
Function
Converts transistor output signals from drive control output terminals Y1 to Y4 to relay (1SPDT) output signals.
Specifications Input None
Output Four-channel contact (12 terminals from Y1A to Y4C) 250 VAC, 0.3A, ocs dia. = 0.3
Power source The power source to drive the relay card is supplied from the drive.
Connection
diagram
Remarks
Includes 4 relay output circuits
RY
+ 13Vdc
5G
Y1A
Y1C
Y1B
5G
5G
5G
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
+ 24Vdc
CM
RY
+13Vdc
Y2A
Y2C
Y2B
+24Vdc
CM
RY
+13Vdc
Y3A
Y3C
Y3B
+24Vdc
CM
RY
+13Vdc
Y4A
Y4C
Y4B
+24Vdc
CM
14-1
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
14. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
14.1 General
In accordance with the provisions described in the European Commission Guidelines Document on Council Directive
89/336/EEC, GE Fuji has chosen to classify the AF-300 P11 range of Drives as Complex Components.
Classification as a Complex Components allows a product to be treated as an apparatus, and thus permits
compliance with the essential requirements of the EMC Directive to be demonstrated to both an integrator of AF-300
P11 drives and to his customer or the installer and the user.
AF-300 P11 drive is supplied CE-marked, signifying compliance with EC Directive 89/336/EEC when fitted with
specified filter units installed and earthed in accordance with this sheet.
This Specification requires the following performance criteria to be met.
EMC product standard EN61800-/13/1997
Immunity: Second environment (Industrial environment)
Emision: First environment (Domestic environment)
Finally, it is the customers responsibility to check whether the equipment conforms to EMC directive.
14.2 Recommended Installation Instructions
It is necessary that to conform to the EMC Directive, these instructions must be followed.
Follow the usual safety procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical connections to the filter,
Drive and motor must be made by a qualified electrical technician.
1) Use the correct filter according to Table on page 6-39.
2) Install the Drive and filter in the electrically shielded metal wiring cabinet.
3) The back panel of the wiring cabinet should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter. Care should be
taken to remove any paint etc. from the mounting holes and face area of the panel. This will ensure the best
possible grounding of the filter.
4) Use the shield cable for the control , motor and other main wiring which are connected to the Drive. These shields
should be securely grounded.
5) It is important that all wire lengths are kept as short as possible and that incoming mains and outgoing motor
cables are kept well separated.
To minimize the conducted radio disturbance in the power distribution systems, the length of the motor-cable should
be as short as possible.
6) In the case where a ferrite ring is provided with the filter, fit the ferrite ring so the conductors pass through the
center of the ferrite. Wire the cable according to Fig.6 or Fig.7 , paying attention to the applied Drive type.
14-2
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Applied Drive AF-300 P11
[Hp] Max. rated voltage 3 Phase 230 VAC
Filter Type
P11 (Fuji model #) Rated EN55011 EN55011 Dimensions Mount. Dim. Ferrite Total Watt Note
Current Class B Class A L x W x H (mm) Y x X (mm) Ring (Qty) Wt. (lb) loss [W]
0.25 0.4
0.5 1.4
1 5.1
2 3.9 Fig. 1
3 164 ft 8.2 Separate
5 (50m) 21 Type
7.5 24
10 40
15 42
20 68
25 74
30 99
40
RF3180F11
(RF3180-F11)
180A
19.49x7.87x6.3
(495x200x160)
18.4x6.53
(468x166)
48.7 60
Fig. 3
Separate
Type
50 48.7 120
60
75 400A 328 Ft 110 220 Fig. 4
100 (100m) Separate
125 Type
150
[HP] Max. rated voltage 3 Phase 480 VAC
0.5 0.8
1 3.1
2 3.1
3 6.9 Fig. 2
5 18 Separate/
7.5 33 ft 164 ft 10 Integral
10 (10m) (50m) 17 Type
15 24
29
49
25 47
30 62
40
RF3100F11
(RF3100-F11)
100A
17.13x7.87x5.19
(435x200x130)
16.06x6.54
(408x166)
28.6
21
50 Fig. 3
60 Separate
75 60 Type
100
125
150 328 ft
200 (100m) Fig. 4
250 Separate
300 220 Type
350
400 130 180
500
500 142 180 Fig. 5
600 F200 Separate
700 160 Type
800 [3]
20
RF3880F11
(RF3880-F11)
27.09x14.33x7.09
(688x364x180)
25.51x5.91
(648x150)
800A
RF3400F11
(RF3400-F11)
23.11x9.84x8.07
(587x250x205)
22.05x3.35
(560x85)
2.0
2.6
4.0
7.9
8.8
48.7
84.8
110

19.49x7.87x6.3
(495x200x160)
18.4x6.53
(468x166)
23.11x9.84x8.07
(587x250x205)
22.05x3.35
(560x85)
13.43x8.86x1.87
(341x225x47.5)
12.24x6.57
(311x167)
19.69x9.84x2.76
(500x250x70)
17.68x7.28
(449x185)
12.6x4.56x1.65
(320x116x42)
11.54x3.54
(293x90)
12.6x6.1x1.77
(320x155x45)
11.54x4.13
(293x105)
180A
280A
400A
12A
35A
50A
72A
RF3180F11
(RF3180-F11)
RF3280F11
(RF3280-F11)
RF3400F11
(RF3400-F11)
EFL400G114
(EFL-4.0G11-4)
EFL750G114
(EFL-7.5G11-4)
EFL150G114
(EFL-15G11-4)
EFL220G114
(EFL-22G11-4)
EFL075G114
(EFL-0.75G11-4)
5A
6A
25A
50A
100A
150A
11.0
Tested Motor
Cable Length
EFL220SP2
(EFL-22SP-2)
OF2 [1]
OF3 [1]
RFI Filter Data
EFL075SP2
(EFL-0.75SP-2)
EFL370SP2
(EFL-3.7SP-2)
EFL150SP2
(EFL-15SP-2)
OF1 [1]
OF2 [1]
3.3
5.5
10x3.74
(254x95)
19.17x6.30
(487x160)
280A
EFL750SP2
(EFL-7.5SP-2)
RF3280F11
(RF3280-F11)
120
9.57 x3.35x3.66
(243x85x93)
10.75x4.72x6.22
(273x120x158)
9.17x4.13x5.35
(233x105x136)
20.2x8.07x7.6
(513x205x193)
44.1
8.98x2.32
(228x59)
8.46x 3.15
(215x80)
14-3
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Part No. D H T
OF1 0.98 (25) 2.01 (51) 0.67 (17)
OF2 1.61 (41) 2.80 (71) 0.71 (18)
OF3 2.83 (72) 3.94 (100) 1.06 (27)
Ferrite Ring Dimensions : Inches (mm)
Figure 1
Figure 2
14-4
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
W W1 H H1 D
RF3100-F11 7.87 (200) 6.54 (166) 17.1 (435) 16.1 (408) 5.12 (130)
RF3180-F11 7.87 (200) 6.54 (166) 19.5 (495) 18.4 (468) 6.30 (160)
Dimensions : Inches (mm)
Filter Type
Figure 3 Outline Dimensions (RF3100-F11, RF3180-F11)
Figure 4 Outline Dimensions (RF3280-F11, RF3400-F11)
14-5
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Figure 5 Outline Dimensions (RF3880-F11)
Figure 6 230V all Hp
460V less than 450 Hp
14-6
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Figure 7 AF-300 P11 460V 500 Hp and higher
GEI-100364D
Supersedes GEI-100364C
070730
FERGADV
GE Consumer & Industrial
41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062
www.geelectrical.com
GE Consumer & Industrial
AF-300 P11
Users Guide
G
E

C
o
n
s
u
m
e
r

&

I
n
d
u
s
t
r
i
a
l























A
F
-
3
0
0

P
1
1

U
s
e
r

s

G
u
i
d
e
























































































































G
E
I
-
1
0
0
3
6
4
D